Iasimp qs019 - en P

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 396

Quick Start

Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit


Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required
to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

Allen-Bradley, ArmorStart, CenterONE, CompactLogix, ControlFLASH, ControlLogix, CrossWorks, DPI, DriveExplorer, DriveTools, E3, E3 Plus, E300, Explorer, FactoryTalk, GuardLogix, HPK-Series, Integrated
Architecture, Kinetix, LDC-Series, LDL-Series, Logix5000, MCS, MP-Series, PanelView, PowerFlex, ProposalWorks, RailBuilder, RDD-Series, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSLogix, RSLinx, SCANport,
SMC, Stratix, Studio 5000 Logix Designer, Studio 5000, TL-Series, and Ultra are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Where to Start

Follow this path to complete your Drives and Motion application.

Chapter 1
Initial System Configuration
Using the DMAT Wizard

Chapter 4
Logic Configuration

Servo Drive
Chapter 2
Bill of Materials Completion Chapter 5
FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

POWERFLEX 4
AC DRIVE

Assembly

Packaging

Chapter 7
Chapter 3 Chapter 6 Motion System Application Guide
System Layout and Wiring System
USER PROTECTED
XXXVAC SUPPLY Commissioning 755
300

MAINS DISCONNECT
PROTECTION
XXAMPS

FILTERED POWER

Chapter 7
System Application Guide

The machine can go from any state in the shaded box to STOPPING.

IDLE START
RESETTING STARTING RUNNING
(enabled)

DRIVE
PROTECTION FIELD SIDE

MOTOR MOTOR_01 STOP


ABORT

STOPPING The machine can go from any state


in the solid box to ABORTING.
ABORTING
RESET

CLEAR
STOPPED CLEARING ABORTED
(disabled)

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 3


Where to Start

Notes:

4 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Summary of Changes

This manual contains new and updated information.

New and Updated This table contains the changes made to this revision.

Information Topic
Added user manual references for E300™ overload relays and ArmorStart® distributed motor controllers 15
Page

Updated Motion Analyzer Software with online dialog boxes 23


Added PowerFlex 527 drives, E300 relays, and ArmorStart motor controllers to Faceplate Displays table 109, 117
Added Kinetix 5500 and PowerFlex 527 to Commissioning CIP Motion Drives 157
Added Commissioning E300 Electronic Overload Relays 170
Added Commissioning ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers 174
Added Commissioning ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers 176
Added E300 Overload Relay Faceplates 208
Added ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Faceplates 216
Added E300 overload relays and ArmorStart distributed motor controllers to Module Routine Overview 227
Added PowerFlex 527 to Configure CIP Motion Drive Modules 315
Added E300 Overload Relay Configuration 345
Added ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Configuration 352
Added Import and Configure E300 Device Modules 380
Added Import and Configure ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Device Modules 387

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 5


Summary of Changes

Notes:

6 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Table of Contents

Preface
About This Publication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Required Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 1
Initial System Configuration Using Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
the DMAT Wizard What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Review the DMAT Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Simple System and Drive Configuration Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Bill of Material Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
System Drawing Set Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Project File Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FactoryTalk View Me Project File Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Review Other System Selection and Configuration Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Motion Analyzer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Engineering Assistant Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Product Selection Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Install Other System Selection and Configuration Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Motion Analyzer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Install Engineering Assistant Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Install Product Selection Toolbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Run the DMAT Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Launch the DMAT Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Edit the DMAT Wizard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Chapter 2
Bill of Materials Completion Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Import the Initial Project BOM File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Edit Your Project BOM File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Chapter 3
System Layout and Wiring Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Create a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Edit Power Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Edit Drive, Controller, and Safety I/O Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit System Communication Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Edit System Layout Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 7


Table of Contents

Chapter 4
Logic Configuration Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
What You Need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Import the Preconfigured Logix Designer Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Complete Drive and Motor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Setting Drive Motor Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Set String Tag Names for Alarm History Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Set Visible Rows for Equipment Status Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Set Visible Rows for Equipment Status Faceplate for
Energy Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Set MSG Path in the E3 Plus Energy Monitoring Routine. . . . . . . . 81
Create Specific Application Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Application Code Logic Template Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Application Logic Creation Steps Using Application
Logic Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Application Logic Creation Steps Using Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Verify and Save the Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Chapter 5
FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
What You Need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Design From a Preconfigured HMI Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Open FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Restore and Open a Preconfigured HMI Application . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Delete Unused Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Delete Unused Parameter Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Configure Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Delete Unused Alarm Triggers and Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Design From an Existing HMI Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Open Your Existing HMI Application File and Add Displays . . . 117
Add Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Configure Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Import Alarm Setup File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Delete Unused Alarm Triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Import and Edit Alarm Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Configure Goto Display Buttons on Startup Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configure Equipment Status Faceplate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Add the Equipment Status Faceplate Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Add the ME_Equipment_Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configure Goto Buttons on the Equipment Status Faceplate . . . . 142
Configure Additional Device Value Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Configure Equipment Status Faceplate for Energy Monitoring . . 145

8 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Table of Contents

Chapter 6
System Commissioning Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Download Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Download Logix Designer Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Configure and Download FactoryTalk Project to
PanelView Plus Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Commissioning Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Commissioning CIP Motion Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Commissioning Sercos Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Commissioning PowerFlex 7-class Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Commissioning PowerFlex 5-class Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Commissioning PowerFlex 4-class Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Commissioning Kinetix 300 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Commissioning E3 Plus Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Commissioning E300 Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Commissioning SMC-50 Soft Starter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Commissioning ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers. 174
Commissioning ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers . . . . 176
Commissioning Drives and Motion Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Verify Network Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Clearing Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Operator (manual) Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Program (automatic) Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Chapter 7
System Application Guide Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Machine Startup Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Machine Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Machine Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Program/Operator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
State Diagram Faceplate Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Motion Drives Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Home View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Axis Status Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Axis Control Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fault Indication View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fault Diagnostic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Trend Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
PowerFlex Drives Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Home View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 9


Table of Contents

Fault Indication View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198


Fault Diagnostic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Configuration Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Trend Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Energy Status Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Online Help Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
E3 Plus Overload Relay Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Home/Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fault Indication View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fault Diagnostic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Configuration View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Online Help Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Energy Status Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
E300 Overload Relay Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Home/Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fault Indication View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fault Diagnostic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Configuration View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Online Help Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Trend View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Energy Status View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
SMC-50 Soft Starter Faceplates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Home/Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Fault Indication View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fault Diagnostic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Configuration View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Online Help Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Energy Status Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Home View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fault Indication View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fault Diagnostic Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Configuration Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Trend Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Online Help Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Equipment Status Display Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Equipment Status Display for Energy Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Alarm History Display Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Appendix A
Logic Program Overview Machine/Application/Device Module Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Module Routine Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Machine Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Machine States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Machine Control Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Device and Application Status Rung Tags and Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

10 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Table of Contents

Application Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236


Device Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Device Module Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Device Module Control Logic Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Appendix B
Logic Module Customization Machine State Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Tag and Logic Modification Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
State Display Tag Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Bypass Idle State Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Module Fault Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Alarm History Faceplate Logic Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Coordinated Reset Customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Appendix C
Add Other Devices to the Equipment Add Devices to the Equipment Status Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Status Faceplate Add Optional Faceplate Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Appendix D
Logix Designer Communication and Configure Personal Computer Communication Properties . . . . . . . . . 257
Controller Configuration Configure the EtherNet/IP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Configure the Logix5000 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Appendix E
Create and Add BOM Device Modules Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Without the DMAT Wizard What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Select Initial BOM Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Add BOM Device Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Appendix F
Assemble Project Drawing Set Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Without the DMAT Wizard What You Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Select Drive Power Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Select Controller Power Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Select External Safety Relay Option Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Select Drive I/O Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Select Controller I/O Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Select System Communication Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Select System Layout Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Select Power and Control Component Layout Footprint Drawings . 289

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 11


Table of Contents

Appendix G
Controller, Network, and Device Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Configuration What You Need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Follow These Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Without the DMAT Wizard
Controller and Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Create a New Project File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Configure the Ethernet Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Configure the Sercos Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Save the Project File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Device Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
PowerFlex Drive Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Update PowerFlex Add-On Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
PowerFlex 525 Add-On Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Add and Configure PowerFlex Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Set PowerFlex Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Download Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
CIP Motion Drive Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Configure CIP Motion Drive Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Configure the Motion Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Configure Axis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Sercos Motion Drive Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Configure Sercos Drive Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Configure the Motion Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Configure Axis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Kinetix 300 Drive Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Update Kinetix 300 Add-On Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Add Kinetix 300 Drives to Your Logix Designer Project . . . . . . . . 333
Configure Kinetix 300 Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
E3 Plus Overload Relay with Communication Auxiliary
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Update E3 Plus Add-On Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Add E3 Plus Devices to Your Logix Designer Project . . . . . . . . . . . 344
E300 Overload Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Update E300 Add-On Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Add E300 Devices to Your Logix Designer Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
SMC-50 Soft Starter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Update SMC-50 Add-On Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Add SMC-50 Devices to Your Logix Designer Project . . . . . . . . . . 348
Download Soft Starter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 352
Update ArmorStart Add-On Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Add ArmorStart Devices to Your Logix Designer Project . . . . . . . 352
Import and Configure Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Import and Configure the Machine Logic Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Import and Configure Application Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Import and Configure Device Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

12 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Preface

About This Publication


This quick start provides step by step instructions for using the Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit to help
you design, install, operate, and maintain a drive system. Included are selection tools, layout and wiring drawings,
and pre-configured logic and HMI files to assist you in creating an Integrated Architecture™ solution for your
application requirements.

The instructions also show how the Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit (DMAT) Wizard can automate the
tasks needed to build the files used in the Integrated Architecture solution.

All of the supporting files are included on the Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication
IASIMP-SP017, including the DMAT Wizard. The DVD provides drive selection tools; CAD drawings for
panel layout and wiring; basic status, control, and diagnostic logic files; FactoryTalk® View ME and SE faceplates,
and more. For a copy of the DVD, contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.
With these tools and the built-in best-practices design, the system designer is free to focus on the design of their
machine control and not on design overhead tasks.

You can also download these same supporting files from the Rockwell Automation® Integrated Architecture
Tools website, http://www.ab.com/go/iatools on the Beyond Getting Started tab.

IMPORTANT Before using this quick start and the contents of the Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, read the Terms and Conditions
READ ME.pdf on the DVD.

The beginning of each chapter contains the following information. Read these sections carefully before
beginning work in each chapter.
• Before You Begin - This section lists the steps that must be completed and decisions that must be made
before starting that chapter. The chapters in this quick start do not have to be completed in the order in
which they appear, but this section defines the minimum amount of preparation required before
completing the current chapter.
• What You Need - This section lists the tools that are required to complete the steps in the current chapter.
This includes, but is not limited to, hardware and software.
• Follow These Steps - This illustrates the steps in the current chapter and identifies which steps are
required to complete the examples using specific networks.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 13


Preface

Conventions
Convention Meaning Example
Used as an abbreviation for Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network. This term describes
Rockwell Automation servo drives and high-power AC drives that use CIP Motion and CIP Sync
CIP Motion technology from ODVA, all built on the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) communicating over CIP Motion Drive Configuration
the EtherNet/IP network. Two drive platforms that apply are Kinetix® 6500 servo drives and
PowerFlex® 755 AC drives when used on the EtherNet/IP network.
Click left mouse button once (assumes cursor is positioned on object or selection). Click button
Click Click Browse.
to initiate action.
Click left mouse button twice in quick succession (assumes cursor is positioned on object or
Double-click Double-click the H1 icon.
selection).
Right-click Click right mouse button once (assumes cursor is positioned on object or selection). Right-click the Fieldbus Networks icon.
Click and hold the left mouse button on an object, move the cursor to where you want to move Drag and drop the desired block into the Strategy
Drag and drop the object, and release the mouse button. dialog box.
Select Click to highlight a menu item or list choice. From the pull-down menu, choose H1-1.
Check Consider Case if you want to conduct a case-sensitive
Check/uncheck Click to select a checkbox option. search.
> Shows nested menu selections as menu name followed by menu selection. Click File>Page Setup>Options.
Expand Click the + to the left of a given item /folder to show its contents. In the H1-1 dialog box, expand FFLD.
Enter Used when you can type from the keyboard or choose from a list. Enter the catalog number of the product.
Type Used when the only option is to type from the keyboard. Type the catalog number of the product.
Press a specific button on the PanelView™ terminal or other component with touch-screen
Press Press Axis Control.
technology.

Required Software
Rockwell Automation Software Cat. No. Version Required For
Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application 21.00 or later (1)
RSLogix™ 5000 All Kinetix and PowerFlex drive
• ControlFLASH™ 9324-RLD300xxE
19.00 or later (2) applications
• BOOTP/DHCP utility (EtherNet/IP)
• RSLinx® Classic
FactoryTalk View Studio for Machine Edition
• FactoryTalk Services 9701-VWSTMENE 5.1 or later PanelView Plus terminals
• RSLinx Enterprise
• RSLinx Classic
Motion Analyzer Rockwell Automation Configuration and Selection Tools 5.2 or later Drive/motor sizing
website http://www.rockwellautomation.com/en/e-tools
ProposalWorks™ or ask your Rockwell Automation sales representative for the 7.5 or later Bill of materials development
Product Selection Toolbox DVD
CAD files, wiring diagrams,
Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD IASIMP-SP017 N/A application files, and other
support information
(1) When PowerFlex 527 drives are used, version 24.00 or later is required.
(2) When Kinetix 350 servo drives are used, version 20.00 or later is required.

14 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Preface

Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.

Resource Description
PowerFlex 4 Adjustable Frequency Drive User Manual, publication 22A-UM001
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency Drive User Manual, publication 22B-UM001
Provides mounting and wiring instructions for PowerFlex 4-class AC drives. Also provides
PowerFlex 40P Adjustable Frequency Drive User Manual, publication 22D-UM001 information on how to set drive parameters and troubleshoot the drive.
PowerFlex 70 and 70EC Adjustable Frequency Drive User Manual, publication 20A-UM001
PowerFlex 400 Adjustable Frequency Drive User Manual, publication 22C-UM001
PowerFlex 525 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive User Manual, publication 520-UM001 Provides mounting and wiring instructions for PowerFlex 525 AC drives.
PowerFlex 527 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive User Manual, publication 520-UM002 Provides mounting and wiring instructions for PowerFlex 527 AC drives.
PowerFlex 700 Adjustable Frequency Drive User Manual, publication 20B-UM001
PowerFlex 700H Adjustable Frequency Drive User Manual, publication 20C-PM001
PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive, Phase II User Manual, publication 20D-UM006 Provides mounting and wiring instructions for PowerFlex 7-class AC drives. Also provides
PowerFlex 700S High Performance Drive, Phase I User Manual, publication 20D-UM001 information on how to set drive parameters and troubleshoot the drive.

PowerFlex 700 Vector Controlled AC Drives User Manual, publication 20B-UM002


PowerFlex 750-Series AC Drives Installation Instructions, publication 750-IN001
Provides drive specifications for the PowerFlex 4-class, 5-class, and 7-class AC drive
PowerFlex Family Selection Guide, publication PFLEX-SG002 products.
PowerFlex 70 EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 20COMM-UM010
PowerFlex 70 DeviceNet Adapter User Manual, publication 20COMM-UM002 Provides details on how to install, configure, and use the adapter.
PowerFlex 525 Embedded EtherNet/IP Adapter User Manual, publication 520COM-UM001
Kinetix 300 EtherNet/IP Indexing Drives User Manual, publication 2097-UM001
Kinetix 350 Single-axis EtherNet/IP Drives User Manual, publication 2097-UM002
Kinetix 6200 and Kinetix 6500 Modular Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual,
publication 2094-UM002
Provides mounting, wiring, configuring, and troubleshooting instructions for the Kinetix
Kinetix 6000 Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2094-UM001 Motion Control servo drives.
Kinetix 6000M Integrated Drive-Motor System User Manual, publication 2094-UM003
Kinetix 2000 Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2093-UM001
Kinetix 7000 Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2099-UM001
Ultra™3000 Digital Servo Drives Installation Manual, publication 2098-IN003 Provides mounting and wiring instructions for Ultra3000 digital servo drives.

Ultra3000 Digital Servo Drives Integration Manual, publication 2098-IN005 Provides configuring and troubleshooting instructions for the Ultra3000 digital servo
drives.
Overview of Kinetix servo drives, motors, actuators, and motion accessories designed to
Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide, publication GMC-SG001 help make initial decisions for the motion control products best suited for your system
requirements.

Kinetix Rotary Motion Specifications, publication GMC-TD001 Product specifications for MP-Series™ (Bulletin MPL, MPM, MPF, MPS), Kinetix 6000M
(Bulletin MDF), TL-Series™, RDD-Series™, and HPK-Series™ rotary motors.
Product specifications for Bulletin MPAS and MPMA linear stages, Bulletin MPAR, MPAI,
Kinetix Linear Motion Specifications, publication GMC-TD002 and TLAR electric cylinders, and LDC-Series™ and LDL-Series™ linear motors.
Product specifications for Kinetix Integrated Motion over the EtherNet/IP network,
Kinetix Servo Drives Specifications, publication GMC-TD003 Integrated Motion over sercos interface, EtherNet/IP networking, and component servo
drive families.

Kinetix Motion Accessories Specifications, publication GMC-TD004 Product specifications for Bulletin 2090 motor and interface cables, low-profile
connector kits, drive power components, and other servo drive accessory items.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 15


Preface

Resource Description
Kinetix 6000 and Kinetix 6200/6500 Drive Systems Design Guide, publication GMC-RM003
Kinetix 300 and Kinetix 350 Drive Systems Design Guide, publication GMC-RM004 System design guide to determine and select the required (drive specific) drive module,
power accessory, connector kit, motor cable, and interface cable catalog numbers for
Kinetix 2000 Drive Systems Design Guide, publication GMC-RM006 your drive and motor/actuator motion control system. Included are system performance
specifications and torque/speed curves (rotary motion) and force/velocity curves (linear
Kinetix 7000 Drive Systems Design Guide, publication GMC-RM007 motion) for your motion application.
Ultra3000 Drive Systems Design Guide, publication GMC-RM008
E3™ and E3 Plus™ Solid-state Overload Relay User Manual, publication 193-UM002. Provides mounting and installation instructions for E3 and E3 Plus overload relays and
EtherNet/IP Communications Auxiliary User Manual, 193-UM014 Bulletin 193 EtherNet/IP communication auxiliary modules.

Provides mounting, wiring, configuring, and troubleshooting instructions for E300


E300 Electronic Overload Relay User Manual, publication 193-UM015 (Bulletin 193/592) electronic overload relays.
SMC™-50 Solid-state Smart Motor Controller User Manual, publication 150-UM011. Provides mounting and installation instructions for SMC-50 soft-starter modules.
ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller User Manual, publication 290E-UM001
Provides installation and wiring instructions for the ArmorStart motor controllers. Also
ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP User Manual, provides information on how to set parameters and troubleshoot the device.
publication 280E-UM001
Sercos and Analog Motion Configuration and Startup User Manual, publication Information on configuring and troubleshooting your ControlLogix® and CompactLogix™
MOTION-UM001 sercos interface modules.

Motion Coordinate System User Manual, publication MOTION-UM002 Information to create a motion coordinate system with sercos or analog motion
modules.
Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network Configuration and Startup User Manual, Information on configuring and troubleshooting your ControlLogix and CompactLogix
publication MOTION-UM003 EtherNet/IP network modules.
Integrated Motion on the Ethernet/IP Network Reference Manual, Provides descriptions of the AXIS_CIP_DRIVE attributes and Logix Designer application
publication MOTION-RM003 Control Modes and Methods.

You can view or download publications at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature. To order paper


copies of technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales
representative.

16 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Chapter 1

Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

In this chapter you use the Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit (DMAT) Wizard to create an initial bill of
materials, assemble a system drawing set, and create a Studio 5000 Logix Designer project file with a
preconfigured controller, network, drives and initial system program logic. In addition, you are introduced to
several Rockwell Automation system configuration tools that provide assistance in sizing your motor/drive
combinations for a variety of load, transmission, and application types.

To assist you in architecture and hardware selection, the Widg-O-matic machine application is referenced in the
selection steps. Hardware selection includes all power and control equipment to support two servo drives for the
X-Y gantry, one PowerFlex drive for the conveyor, and one Kinetix 300 drive for the packaging diverter.
Widg-O-matic Machine Application Example

Assembly

X-Y Gantry

X-Servo
Packaging

Y-Servo Conveyor

r
oto
ti onM
uc
Ind

Diverter
en
riv
r D d er
Moto Cylin
vo ric
Ser Elect
300

755

Kinetix 6500 PowerFlex 753 Kinetix 300


Drives Drive Drive

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 17


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

Before You Begin


Collect specific application data, for example:
• System Input Voltage
• Ambient temperature and Altitude Specifications
• Transmission Type
• Motor data
• Load Data – Inertia and Cycle Profiles
• Other System Sizing Info

What You Need


• The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.
• PowerFlex Family Selection Guide, publication PFLEX-SG002.
• Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide, publication GMC-SG001.

Follow These Steps


Complete the following steps to create a bill of materials and size your drives and motion system components.

Start

Install Other System Selection and


Review the DMAT Wizard
Configuration Tools

page 19 page 26

Review Other System Selection and


Run the DMAT Wizard
Configuration Tools

page 23 page 28

18 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

Review the DMAT Wizard


Once you have a general idea of the overall control architecture, relative size, and type of the drives in your
system, you can use the DMAT Wizard to create a bill of material, assemble a system drawing set, and create a
Logix Designer application project file with a preconfigured controller, network, drives, and initial system
program logic. This can be accomplished in minutes by inserting simple system and drive configuration entries
and running other system selection tools as needed.

Simple System and Drive Configuration Entries

Bill of Material Output


The initial BOM files include power and control distribution equipment, control circuit protection, operator
devices, and system drives and accessories.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 19


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

System Drawing Set Output


The assembled system drawing set includes power distribution, drive power and control wiring, communication,
and system layout drawings in .dwg, .dxf, or .pdf formats.

Drive I/O Example

System Layout Example

Drive Power Example


LIM Module

AC Line Filter
Insert images diagonal/down/partial overlap
<Wizard01.jpg, TBT>, <Wizard02.jpg, TBT>

20 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

Project File Output


The project file includes preconfigured controller, drives, network, and machine/application/ device program
logic providing an integrated logic architecture to add your specific application logic to. The preconfigured file
saves hours in logic configuration and assembly.
MODULE COMMANDS
3 NOP

RESET
Machine Commands Servo Ready for Use
Mach_Ctrl.Cmd.RESET Servo_Ctrl.Status.Ready
<WidgOmatic.Cmd.RESET> ONS[0].5 <Gantry_X_Axis_Ctrl.Status.Ready> MOV
4 ONS Move
Source 1

Dest ResetSEQ[0]
0

STOP
Machine Commands
Mach_Ctrl.Cmd.STOP
<WidgOmatic.Cmd.STOP> FLL
5 Fill File
Source 0
Dest ResetSEQ[0]
Length 4
CLEAR

Servo OK (NOT
Machine Commands Faulted) Clear Faults
Mach_Ctrl.Cmd.CLEAR Servo_Ctrl.Status.OK Servo_Ctrl.Cmd.ClearFaults
<WidgOmatic.Cmd.CLEAR> <Gantry_X_Axis_Ctrl.Status.OK> <Gantry_X_Axis_Ctrl.Cmd.ClearFaults>
6 / L
Module OK (NOT
Faulted)
Module.OK
<Gantry_X_Drive.OK> FLL
Fill File
Source 0
Dest AbortSEQ[0]
Length 4
ABORT
Module OK (NOT
Machine Commands Faulted)
Mach_Ctrl.Cmd.ABORT Module.OK
<WidgOmatic.Cmd.ABORT> <Gantry_X_Drive.OK> ONS[0].6 FLL
7 ONS Fill File
Source 0
Module OK (NOT
Dest ResetSEQ[0]
Faulted)
Length 4
Module.OK
<Gantry_X_Drive.OK> ONS[0].7
/ ONS MOV
Move
Source 1

Dest AbortSEQ[0]
0

(End)

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 21


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

FactoryTalk View Me Project File Output


The FactoryTalk View Me ConfigurationGuide folder contains two files. The FactoryTalk View Me (.apa) file
contains the basic screens and parameters needed for a DMAT Wizard application. The folder also includes a
Microsoft Word document with custom instructions on how to adapt the example file to your application drive
set and prepare it to add any additional screens.

Factory Talk View ME Configuration Guide


This guide was created based on your DMAT Wizard selections and is meant to assist you in designing your
Factory Talk View ME application using the DMAT Pre-configured HMI application files. Use this document as a
supplement to the Design From a Preconfigured HMI Application File section in Chapter 5 of the Drives and Motor
Accelerator Toolkit Quick Start guide, IASIMP-QS019A-EN-P.

This document will define specific steps to help you:


Restore and Open a Preconfigured HMI Application
Delete Unused Displays
Delete Unused Parameter Files
Configure Parameter Files
Delete Unused Alarm Triggers and Tags
Configure Goto Display Buttons on Startup Display
Configure Equipment Status Faceplate Display

Design From a Preconfigured HMI Application File

Restore and Open a Preconfigured HMI Application


1. Navigate to the Panelview Plus 1000 folder

2. Double-click the PVP1000_Application.apa archive file

Delete Unused Displays


List of Required Faceplates

[ALARM]
[DIAGNOSTICS]
[INFORMATION]
CIPMotion Faceplate
K300_Faceplate
PowerFlex_753_755_Faceplate
PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate
PVP1000_StateDiagram_Faceplate
PVP1000_AlarmHistory_Faceplate
PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate

Delete Unused Parameter Files


List of Required Parameter Files

CIPMotion_Parameter
K300_Parameter
PF_Parameter
Startup_Parameter
StateDiagram_Parameter
EquipmentStatus_Parameter

22 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

Review Other System Selection and Configuration Tools


Rockwell Automation provides a variety of other system selection and configuration tools.

Motion Analyzer Software


Motion Analyzer software is a comprehensive standard-drives and motion-control application sizing tool used
for analysis, optimization, selection, and validation. Motion Analyzer software includes configuration of load
types, profiles, and mechanisms for a variety of applications.
Load Type and Data

Mechanism Type and Data

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 23


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

Profile Data

Solution Options

Engineering Assistant Software


Engineering Assistant software provides inertia, power/
torque, braking, and other application specific calculators and
formulas to assist you in sizing the motor, drive, and
transmission for your application. Use this software as a
supplement to Motion Analyzer.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

Product Selection Toolbox


Product Selection & System Design Tools

• Provides access to information on a broad range of


The Rockwell Automation Product Selection Toolbox Allen-Bradley® products and services
(PST) offers a complete suite of user tools for product • Easy product selection interface to make it a snap to
selection and configuration across product lines from determine the exact catalog numbers for the item
project conception through final design. From push you need
buttons to drives to motor control centers and fully • Access to current list pricing, and a comprehensive
networked control systems, you’ll find the product supplemental product information list
information and configuration assistance you need to • Contains features, such as product selection wizards,
agreement pricing, a spare parts generator, and the
help you and your customers succeed with Rockwell ability to separate part numbers to see what
Automation. Rockwell Automation components comprise them
• All of these features and more can help you select
the correct product based on your requirements and
give your customers the information they need fast

• Lets you quickly develop Logix/NetLinx control


system configurations with BOM and reports
• Integration with configurator allows configuration
of PowerFlex drives and ArmorStart motor
controllers
• Motion control drive/motor combinations and
accessories can be added through links to Motion
Analyzer software
• New Ethernet capabilities include Stratix™ switches
and physical media with enhanced graphical views
• IAB output can be easily exported to ProposalWorks
to take advantage of extended proposal generation
features, and supplementary data
• Assists the user in selecting correct motor for application, proper drive, and gearbox
(if required)
• Effective optimization capabilities allow user to get the most out of the selected
motor and drive combination
• Intuitive software application designed specifically for configuring Motor
Control Centers
• User friendly interface helps reduce error and enables customers to get their
MCCs quickly
• Allows users to have the most up-to-date applications, product, price, and
supplementary information
• All programs are scheduled for update every three weeks

• Simplifies the design of custom terminal block rails


• Allows you to select and place terminal blocks on mounting rail along with
• Helps you configure Motor Control System starters for rated motor voltages from 230…690V specifying labeling of terminal blocks, locating jumper bars between blocks,
• Program provides the correct catalog number, wiring diagram, and layout drawing for starters automatically selecting end barriers, and partition plates
of your choice
• Provides assistance in selecting and dimensioning all of required busbar rack components

• Allows you select product 3D CAD drawings in AutoCAD software


• Provides you with access to thousands of drawings for a wide range of Allen-Bradley
• Assists in crossing competitive part numbers to Rockwell Automation equivalents products as well as assistance configuring catalog numbers
• Gives users the ability to submit crosses directly to PST and they will provide a cross or users
can go to: ab.com/e-tools and look up existing cross references in the database

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 25


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

Install Other System Selection and Configuration Tools


You can install the system selection and configuration software tools from the Drives and Motion Accelerator
Toolkit DVD or download/access them from the Web.

Motion Analyzer Software


To access Motion Analyzer software, go to https://motionanalyzer.rockwellautomation.com. Login or create an
account to use the Motion Analyzer system sizing and selection tool.

Install Engineering Assistant Software


Follow these steps to install the Engineering Assistant Software tool from the Drives and Motion Accelerator
Toolkit DVD.

1. Navigate to and select the Engineering Assistant Installation application on the toolkit DVD.

The initial Engineering Assistant Setup dialog box


opens.
2. Click OK and follow installation instructions.

26 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

Install Product Selection Toolbox


Follow these steps to install desired tools from the Product Selection Toolbox. ProposalWorks software
installation is the minimum requirement for completing your system bill of materials in the next chapter.

1. Navigate to and select the System Selection and Configuration Tools Installation application on the Drives
and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD.

The Product Selection Toolbox Software InstallShield Wizard opens.


2. Check all features that you wish to have installed.

3. Click Next and follow all install wizard instructions to complete the software installation.
ProposalWorks software installation is the minimum requirement for completing your system bill of
materials in the next chapter.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 27


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

Run the DMAT Wizard


The DMAT Wizard creates an initial bill of materials, assembles a system drawing set, and creates a Logix
Designer project file with preconfigured controller, network, drives, and initial system program logic. All of this
is created in just minutes by executing the following steps.

If you prefer to build these initial files by using the traditional application tools, skip over this section and go
directly to Chapter 2.

Launch the DMAT Wizard


Follow these steps to launch the DMAT Wizard and set up your wizard configuration.

1. Navigate to and select the DMAT Wizard .exe file on the Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD
image.

The Open or Create a Project dialog box opens.


2. Click Create New to initiate a new project.
Another configuration information dialog appears
explaining machine, application, and drive
configuration.
3. Read configuration information dialog box and
click OK to continue.

4. The New Project Wizard dialog box opens.


a. Enter Project Name.
b. Enter Project Description (optional).
c. Click Next.

28 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

5. From the Number of Machines pull-down menu, choose


the number of machines in your project.
A machine, as defined by the wizard, is a control system
using a single controller and housed in a single enclosure.
6. Click Next.

7. Click the Machine Name edit field and enter the desired
machine name.
For the Widg-O-matic example, the machine name
entered is WidgOmatic.

8. Click the Power Voltage Class edit field and from the
pull-down menu choose the power voltage for your
system.
For the Widg-O-matic example, the voltage level is 400/
460V AC.

9. Click the Application Qty edit field and from the pull-
down menu choose the number of applications you are
configuring.
For the Widg-O-matic example, the quantity is set to 2.
10. Click Next.
The WidgoMatic machine displays with the number of
applications specified in step 9.

11. Click the Application_x edit fields and rename the application names.

For the Widg-O-matic example, the two applications were renamed Assembly and Packaging.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 29


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

12. From the Low-Voltage drives pull-down menus, choose the number of low-voltage drives to assign to each
application.

For the Widg-O-matic example, the quantity was set to 0 for the Assembly application and 1 for the
Packaging application.
13. From each of the Servo Drives pull-down menus, choose the number of servo drives to assign to each
application.

There are three types of servo drives. For the Widg-O-matic example, the CIP Motion Servo Drives
quantity was set to 2 for the Assembly application and the EtherNet/IP Indexing Servo Drives quantity
was set to 1 for the Packaging application. Also, you can set the number of electronic overload relays and
soft-starter modules for your application.
14. Click Finish.
The DMAT Wizard configuration dialog box opens.

30 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

Edit the DMAT Wizard Configuration


Follow these steps to continue editing the DMAT Wizard configuration.

1. Edit your Machine Configuration.

a. Click the machine in your project configuration tree.


In this example, the machine name is WidgOmatic. The Machine editing window appears to the right
of the project tree.
b. Click the Machine Name edit field to change the machine name.
c. Click each of the other machine configuration pull-down menus or check boxes and choose the
appropriate power and control options.
d. Select the Programming Software you intend to use for your application.
e. Repeat step 1 for each of your machines in your project.
2. Edit the Application Names.

a. Click an application in the project configuration tree.


For the WidgOmatic example, Assembly was selected. The Application editing window appears to the
right of the project configuration tree.
b. Click the Application Name edit field to change the application name.
c. Repeat step 2 for each of the applications in your project.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 31


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

3. Edit the SERCOS, CIP Motion, and Ethernet/IP Indexing Servo Drive Configurations.

a. Select a servo drive in the project configuration tree.


For the WidgOmatic example, CIP_Motion_Servo_Drive_1 was selected. The drive editing window
appears to the right of the project configuration tree.
b. Click the Drive Name edit field and enter the desired drive name.
For the WidgOmatic example, Gantry_X was entered as the initial drive name.
c. Click the Drive Type pull-down menu to choose the drive family.

For the WidgOmatic example, the Kinetix 6500 drive was chosen.
d. For assistance in sizing complex motor/drive combinations, click Motion Analyzer or Kinetix Motion
Control Selection Guide, then return to this wizard section to complete your drive/motor
configuration.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

4. For multi-axis servo drive types, select an integrated axis module (IAM) for the first drive of its type.
For the WidgOmatic example, the Gantry_X drive is configured as an IAM module.

a. From the Spare Slot Count pull-down menu, choose the number of spare slots available on the Bulletin
2094 power rail.
b. From the Inverter Current Rating pull-down menu, choose the inverter current rating for your drive.
c. From the Converter Power Rating pull-down menu, choose the converter power rating for your drive.
d. Check Shunt Module if the Bulletin 2094 (rail-mounted) shunt module is included on your power rail.
e. Note the Slot Count value.
This is the total number of slots used on the 2094 power rail. You are prompted if the slot count exceeds
the power rail capacity.
f. Check Velocity and Torque Mode Only if you would like the servo drive axis to be configured for
Velocity mode.
To select Torque mode, use the Axis Properties configuration in the Logix Designer application. If this
box is clear, the axis configuration defaults to Position mode.
g. From the pull-down menus, choose the Motor Type and Motor Series being paired with the drive.
For the WidgOmatic example, the Gantry_X drive is configured for the Rotary Motor Type and the
MPL Motor Series.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 33


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

5. For single-axis drive types or secondary multi-axis servo drives, select the appropriate axis module (AM)
configuration option.
For the WidgOmatic example, the Gantry_Y drive is a Kinetix 6500 (K6500) AM module.

a. From the Inverter Current Rating pull-down menu, choose the inverter current rating for your drive.
b. From the Parent IAM Drive pull-down menu, select the parent IAM module this AM module is
assigned to (applies to multi-axis systems only).
AM modules must be assigned to a parent IAM module of the same drive family.
c. From the pull-down menus, choose the Motor Type and Motor Series being paired with the drive.
For the WidgOmatic example, the Gantry_Y drive is configured for the Rotary Motor Type and the
MPL Motor Series.
d. Repeat step 3 through step 5 for all of the remaining servo drives in your project.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard Chapter 1

6. Edit the Low-Voltage Drive configurations.

a. Select Low_Voltage_Drive_x in the project configuration tree.


For the WidgOmatic example, Low_Voltage_Drive_1 was selected. The drive editing window appears
to the right of the project configuration tree.

b. Click the Drive Name edit field and enter the desired drive name.
For the WidgOmatic example, Conveyor_Drive was entered as the initial drive name.
c. From the Drive Type pull-down menu, choose the drive family.
For the WidgOmatic example, the PowerFlex 753 (PF753) drive is selected.
d. Select the appropriate output current for the drive.
e. Repeat step 6 for all of the remaining low-voltage drives in your project.
7. Edit all electronic overload relays and soft starter modules in your application.
Current and other selection pull-down menus are similar to the drive menus.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 35


Chapter 1 Initial System Configuration Using the DMAT Wizard

8. Generate the Output Files.


Before you can generate a DMAT file, all red highlighted items must be cleared in your configuration.
a. Click Generate on the DMAT Wizard toolbar.

The Generate Outputs dialog box opens.


b. Check the Drawing Types you wish to have generated as part of the output files.

c. Click Generate.
The DMAT Wizard generates a folder containing the output files. If the Drives and Motion Accelerator
Toolkit was installed in the default directory, you will find the folder located in:
C:\Documents and Settings\My Documents\DMAT\<projectname>.

For the WidgOmatic example, the path is:


C:\Documents and Settings\My Documents\DMAT\WidgOmatic.

d. Double-click the machine folders to view the different output folders and files created.

36 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Chapter 2

Bill of Materials Completion

In this chapter you use Rockwell Automation ProposalWorks software to complete the drives and motion system
bill of materials that the DMAT Wizard created.

If you chose not to use the DMAT Wizard, follow the procedures in Appendix E to assemble the initial BOM
ProposalWorks file before executing the following steps in this chapter. If you do not have ProposalWorks
software, you may use the Microsoft Excel file that the DMAT Wizard provides as a starting point in creating a
bill of materials with the help of your local Allen-Bradley distributor.

Before You Begin


• Complete the initial system configuration using the DMAT Wizard (refer to Chapter 1) or
• Assemble the initial BOM using ProposalWorks software (refer to Appendix E)

What You Need


• The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
• ProposalWorks software, version 7.5 or later, or Microsoft Office Excel 2010
Download ProposalWorks software from http://www.rockwellautomation.com/en/e-tools/ or ask your
local Allen-Bradley distributor for the Product Selection Toolbox DVD.
• The user manual for your Drives and Motion hardware. Refer to Additional Resources on page 15 for
publication numbers.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 37


Chapter 2 Bill of Materials Completion

Follow These Steps


Complete these steps to complete the commissioning process for your drives and motion application.

Start

Import the Initial


Project BOM File

page 38

Edit Your Project BOM File

page 40

Import the Initial Project BOM File


Follow these steps to import the initial project BOM file.

1. Open ProposalWorks software, navigate to File Menu>Utilities, and select Import.

If you chose to assemble the initial BOM file using ProposalWorks software, open the ProposalWorks
(.prp) file you created in Appendix E and skip to step 2.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Bill of Materials Completion Chapter 2

2. Navigate to your projects .bom file and click Open.

If the default DMAT Wizard directory was used, your project's .bom import file is in C:\Documents and
Settings\PC Name\My Documents\DMAT\ProjectName\MachineName\BOM directory.
The Widg-O-matic example file may be found in: C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\
6-Project Examples\Widg-O-matic.
The ProposalWorks file opens.

3. Click Refresh to update prices in local currency.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 39


Chapter 2 Bill of Materials Completion

Edit Your Project BOM File


The DMAT Wizard you used in Chapter 1 or the steps you followed in Appendix E created an initial bill of
materials (BOM), however, individual preconfigured product listings should be reviewed and possibly edited to
fit your specific application needs.

ProposalWorks software includes a variety of specific product configuration tools to make further BOM
adjustments easy. These steps provide examples of using ProposalWorks Product Configuration Assistants to edit
your initial project BOM file to meet your specific application needs.

Follow these steps to edit the BOM file you imported or assembled for your specific application.

1. Edit a product for your specific application.


a. Double-click a product catalog number to activate the Product Configuration Assistant.

In this example, catalog number 1489-A2D250 was selected.


The Product Configuration Assistant dialog box opens. You can browse and select from a variety of
product options.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Bill of Materials Completion Chapter 2

b. Click the Current Rating attribute.

In this example, the Current Rating option is 25 A. For more in-depth product selection information,
refer to product selection guides or Motion Analyzer software.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 41


Chapter 2 Bill of Materials Completion

c. For this example, select 15 A under the Current Rating field.


The catalog number field is replaced with 1489-A2D150.

d. Click Accept to make the product change within the Product Configuration Assistant.
The Product Configuration Assistant closes and your BOM file reflects the change.

42 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Bill of Materials Completion Chapter 2

2. Edit a product group for your specific application.


Product group refers to an item (catalog number) that includes one or more sub items.
a. Double-click a product group catalog
number to activate the Product
Configuration Assistant.
In this example, item 13 (catalog number
2094-BMP5-M) with sub items 13.1 and
13.2 was selected.

The Product Configuration Assistant


dialog box opens. You can browse and
select from a variety of product options.

b. Click the Inverter Current Rating attribute.

In this example, the Inverter Current Rating product option is 4 A. The sub items (13.1 and 13.2)
include the control module and connector kit accessory. For more in-depth product selection
information, refer to product selection guides or Motion Analyzer software.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 43


Chapter 2 Bill of Materials Completion

c. For this example, select 15 A under the Inverter Current Rating field.
The catalog number field was replaced with 2094-BM02-M. In addition, the 2094-EN02D-M01-S1
control module was chosen to replace the 2094-EN02D-M01-S0.

d. Click Accept to make the product change within the Product Configuration Assistant.

Sub item (13.2) also reflects the updated catalog number and description.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Bill of Materials Completion Chapter 2

3. Delete products not required for your specific application.


a. Select the product or product group not required for your application.

In this example, items 37 and 38 were selected.


b. From your keyboard, press delete.

The product or products are deleted from the BOM project file.
4. Save your edited BOM project file.
5. Send the BOM project file to your Rockwell Automation distributor for a quote.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 45


Chapter 2 Bill of Materials Completion

Notes:

46 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Chapter 3

System Layout and Wiring

In this chapter you edit the set of layout and wiring drawings from the DMAT drawing library that the DMAT
Wizard created. If you chose not to use the DMAT Wizard, follow the procedures in Appendix F to assemble the
initial project drawing set before executing the steps in this chapter.
Power, I/O, and Layout Drawing Examples

Drive I/O Example

System Layout Example

Drive Power Example


LIM Module
AC Line Filter

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 47


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

To assist you in understanding how to best use the drawing libraries, the Widg-O-matic machine application
example is used in the drawing editing steps provided. The Widg-O-matic machine includes the following drive,
power, and control devices:
• Two Kinetix 6500 (400V-class) servo drives and motors (home and enable inputs)
• One PowerFlex 753 (400V-class) drive and induction motor
• One Kinetix 300 (400V-class) servo drive and electric cylinder
• One Bulletin 2094 line interface module (LIM)
• One ControlLogix controller and EtherNet/IP network module

Before You Begin


• Complete the initial system configuration using the DMAT Wizard (refer to Chapter 1) or
• Assemble the initial project drawing set without the DMAT Wizard (refer to Appendix F)

What You Need


• Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017
• AutoCAD Electrical or AutoCAD software to open the DWG or DXF files
• Adobe Reader software to open PDF files
• Line Interface Module Installation Instructions, publication 2094-IN005
• System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001
• System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Video, publication GMC-SP004
• The user manual for your Drives and Motion hardware. Refer to Additional Resources on page 15 for
publication numbers.

48 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

Follow These Steps


Complete the following steps to create your system layout and wiring drawings. These steps provide general
instructions for how to maximize the use of the toolkit’s drawing library in creating a complete drives-and-
motion system layout and wiring drawing set. AutoCAD or AutoCAD Electrical software is recommended to
take full advantage of the drawing editing steps included in this chapter and the library’s device wiring references
and attributes that move with the devices as you edit your project drawing set. Some of the initial project creation
steps are illustrated using AutoCAD Electrical software, but most are generic and can be used with a variety of
software drawing packages.

If you chose not to use the DMAT Wizard, follow the instructions in Appendix F before executing the following
steps in this chapter.

Start

Create a New Project

page 50

Edit Power Drawings

page 51

Edit Drive, Controller, and Safety


I/O Drawings

page 56

Edit System Communication


Drawings

page 61

Edit System Layout Drawings

page 62

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 49


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

Create a New Project


1. Open your drawing software.
2. Create and name your new project.

3. Add and select the toolkit library drawings assembled by the DMAT Wizard.

4. Navigate to the appropriate DWG or DXF Drawing directory that was created by the DMAT Wizard.
If the default DMAT Wizard directory was used, your project's drawing set is in C:\Documents and
Settings\PC Name\My Documents\DMAT\ProjectName\MachineName\Drawings\filetype directory.
The Widg-O-matic example drawing files may be found in: C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\
DMAT\B-Files\6-Project Examples\Widg-O-matic\WidgOmatic_CAD\filetype directory.
If you chose to assemble the Project Drawing Set without using the DMAT Wizard, navigate to the
drawing directory you created in Appendix F.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

Edit Power Drawings


1. Open your initial drive power drawing that includes the main power distribution components.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 010_K6500_460VAC_w_LIM.dwg file is
opened. Refer to the figure on page 52.
2. Delete drives not used in your project.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, only two Kinetix 6500 drives are required, so the
third drive is deleted. Refer to the shaded area in the figure on page 52.
3. Open all additional drive drawings and delete drives not used in your project.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, both the
020_K300_460VAC_Additional_Drives.dwg file and the
020_PF750_Series_460VAC_Additional_Drives.dwg file are opened and unused drives are deleted. Refer
to the figures on page 53 and page 54.
4. Open all controller control power drawings and edit power connections and devices as necessary.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, no changes to the
030_CLX_GLX_120VAC_Control_Power.dwg files were required. Refer to the figure on page 55.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 51


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

Kinetix 6500 (460V) Drive with LIM Module

Select and delete


this drive.

52 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

Kinetix 300 (460V) Additional Drives

Select and delete


Select and delete

this drive.
this drive.

Select and delete


this drive.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 53


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

PowerFlex 750 (460V) Additional Drives

Select and delete

Select and delete


this drive.

this drive.
Select and delete
this drive.

54 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

ControlLogix/GuardLogix® (120V) Control Power with LIM Module

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 55


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

Edit Drive, Controller, and Safety I/O Drawings


1. Open all drive, controller, and safety I/O drawings as required for your application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 060_K6500_Digital_IO.dwg file is opened.
2. Delete devices not used in your project.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, only two Kinetix 6500 drives are required, so the
third and fourth I/O blocks are deleted.
Kinetix 6500 Digital I/O Example

Select and delete these drive


I/O blocks.

56 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

3. Add standard or unique I/O devices and connections required for your application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the Enable on-off switches and Home proximity
switches are added to both Kinetix 6500 drives (input 1 and 2 respectively).
Kinetix 6500 Drives (add digital I/O devices)

4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for all I/O drawings within your project.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 57


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

Additional I/O library drawings, used for the Widg-O-matic machine example, are available from the Drives and
Motion Accelerator toolkit DVD. These drawings represent a sample of drive and controller I/O drawings.
Additional I/O Library Drawing Examples
I/O Library Drawings File Name Page
Kinetix 6500 Drive Safety I/O 070_K6500_Safety_IO.dwg 58
Kinetix 6500 Drive Feedback 080_K6500_Feedback.dwg 59
ControlLogix Controller Digital Inputs 090_CLX_Digital_Inputs.dwg 60

Kinetix 6500 Safety I/O

58 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

Kinetix 6500 Feedback

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 59


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

ControlLogix Digital Inputs

60 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

Edit System Communication Drawings


1. Open the communication drawing for your application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 060_120_Ethernet_Communication.dwg file is
opened.
2. Delete network devices not used in the project.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, one of the Kinetix 300 drives and associated cable is
deleted.
Ethernet Communication

Select and
delete
this drive
and cable.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 61


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

3. Add any network device footprints required for your application.


a. Navigate to and open the required footprint drawings that were added to your Project Drawings folder
from the toolkit library.
b. Copy device footprints from the footprint drawings.
In this example, Kinetix 6500 IAM and AM module footprints are copied.
Kinetix 6200/6500 Footprint Drawings

FP_2094-B_6500 FP_2094-B_6500 FP_2094-B_6500 FP_2094-BM_6500 FP_2094-BM_6500 FP_2094-BM_6500

Copy this Copy this


Kinetix 6500 Kinetix 6500
IAM module. AM module.

c. Paste the device footprints onto your communication drawing.


d. Re-route or copy cables on the communication drawings to the added devices.

Edit System Layout Drawings


1. Open the panel layout drawing for your application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 150_CLX_w_LIM_Sm_Panel_Layout.dwg file
is opened.
The panel layout includes a power distribution, drives, and control section. The panel is designed to
accommodate best-practice techniques used to minimize electrical noise. Refer to the System Design for
Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

Small Panel Layout Drawing (power distribution)

LIM Module

AC Line Filter
Power Distribution
Section

CLEAN C2
CLEAN wireway for noise sensitive device
circuits.

DIRTY D6
DIRTY wireway for noise generating
device circuits.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 63


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

2. Replace or add power components to your panel layout drawing.


a. Inspect power section on layout drawing for proper component footprints for the project.
b. Open the associated power footprint drawings that were added to your project drawings from the
toolkit library.
In this example, the 510_Line_Filter_Footprints.dwg file is opened.
Line Filter Footprint Drawing Examples

FP_2090-UXLF-136 FP_2090-UXLF-HV330 FP_2090-XXLF-X330B FP_2090-XXLF-375B_3d

c. If the desired component is not represented in the current panel layout drawing, copy the proper
component footprint from the footprint drawings.
d. Delete the current component in the panel layout drawing and paste the desired component footprint
into its place.
e. Add any other required power components for your system.

64 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

3. Insert drives into the Drives Placement section.


a. Open the panel layout drawing for your application.
Small Panel Layout Drawing

LIM Module

AC Line Filter

Drives Section

CLEAN C2
CLEAN wireway for noise sensitive device
circuits.

DIRTY D6
DIRTY wireway for noise generating
device circuits.

b. Open the associated drives footprint drawings that were added to your project drawings from the
toolkit library.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 430_Kinetix_6200_6500_Footprints.dwg file
is opened.
c. Copy the desired drive components from the footprint drawings for your panel layout drawing.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 65


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

Kinetix 6200/6500 Drive Footprint Drawings

FP_2094-B_6500 FP_2094-B_6500 FP_2094-B_6500 FP_2094-BM_6500 FP_2094-BM_6500 FP_2094-BM_6500

Copy this Copy this


Kinetix 6500 Kinetix 6500
IAM module. AM module.

d. Paste the drive footprints onto the panel layout drawing.


For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, two Kinetix 6500 servo drives, one PowerFlex 753
drive, and one Kinetix 300 drive was added to the layout drawing.
Small Panel Layout Drawing (drive placement)

LIM Module
AC Line Filter

Drives Section

CLEAN C2
CLEAN wireway for noise sensitive device
circuits.

DIRTY D6
DIRTY wireway for noise generating
device circuits.

66 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

4. Inspect control section for required control components and proper footprints.
a. Open the panel layout drawing for your application.
Small Panel Layout Drawing (control)

LIM Module

AC Line Filter

CLEAN C2
CLEAN wireway for noise sensitive device Controller and I/O
circuits. Section

DIRTY D6
DIRTY wireway for noise generating
device circuits.

b. Inspect controller for required processor, I/O chassis, and I/O and communication modules, and add
footprints from the standard library as required.
c. Add any other required control components for your system.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 67


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

5. Edit your Enclosure Layout Drawing.


a. Open the enclosure layout drawing for your application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 140_SM_Enclosure_Layout.dwg file is opened.
Small Enclosure Layout Drawing

b. Inspect the drawing for operator equipment required for your system.
c. Open the associated enclosure footprint drawings that were added to your project drawings from the
toolkit library.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 600_PanelView_Plus_Footprints.dwg file is
opened.

68 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Layout and Wiring Chapter 3

PanelView Plus Footprint Drawings

FP_2711P-B6C20A_FRONT FP_2711P-B10C FP_2711P-B15C

FP_2711P-T7C

FP_2711P-T10C FP_2711P-T15C

FP_2711P-T6C

d. Copy the desired enclosure components from the footprint drawings for your enclosure layout drawing.
e. Paste the enclosure component footprints onto your panel layout drawing.
f. Add any other required enclosure components for your system.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 69


Chapter 3 System Layout and Wiring

Notes:

70 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Chapter 4

Logic Configuration

In this chapter you edit the preconfigured logic file that the DMAT Wizard created for your specific application.

Besides initial controller, network, and device configurations, the preconfigured logic file includes machine,
application, and device logic modules that significantly speed-up your application logic development. In
addition, the logic modules include control, status, and diagnostic code that provides information to
preconfigured operator interface faceplates that you can run on personal computers or PanelViewPlus terminals.

If you chose not to use the DMAT Wizard or desire to add or edit controller, networks, or drives since the
DMAT Wizard was executed, refer to instructions in Appendix G before executing the steps in this chapter.
Logic Modules
HMI Application

Controller Logic
PanelView Plus Terminal

Machine Status Machine Faceplate


Machine
Module
Device Faceplate

Machine Application
Commands Status

Application Operator
Module Commands

Device Device
Commands Status

Device
Module

The machine module provides a state machine model that coordinates multiple devices and application logic for
coordinated drives and motion applications. It provides overall machine commands, for example, start, stop,
abort, clear, and reset to the application modules and the individual device modules based on the status of the
applications and devices.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 71


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

The application modules execute the machine commands and provide the more specific application commands
to the drives and devices. It also coordinates the machine and application status, and executes the application
fault commands. In addition, the toolkit includes motion logic examples to help you create your specific
application logic.

The device modules translate the uniform machine and application commands and provide uniform status and
diagnostics from the very specific device tags and parameters. This reduces much of the non-inventive code
required to control and monitor the many unique devices.

For more information on the machine, application, and device logic modules, refer to Appendix A on page 225.

To assist you in understanding how to best use the preconfigured logic files, the Widg-O-matic machine
application is used as an example in all of the logic configuration steps.
Preconfigured Logic Modules Used in Widg-O-matic Example
Module Type File Names
Machine_Module
Machine
Device&Application_Status
Application_Module
Motion_Simple_Move
Application
PF_Run_Spd
K300_EIPMove
CIPMotion_Drive_Module
Device PF753_Drive_Module
K300_Drive_Module

Before You Begin


Run the DMAT Wizard (refer to Chapter 1) or complete Appendix G.

What You Need


• The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 19.0 or later, or the Logix Designer application, version 21.0 or later.
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.0 or later or the Logix Designer application, version 21.0 or later, to
configure Kinetix 350 servo drives, and when using ControlLogix 1756-L7xS controllers.
• The user manual for your Drives and Motion hardware. Refer to Additional Resources on page 15 for
publication numbers.

72 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

Follow These Steps


Complete these steps to import and configure logic modules for your drives and motion application.

Import the Preconfigured Logix


Start Designer Project

page 74

Complete Drive and Motor


Configuration

page 76

Set String Tag Names for Optional Step


Complete if Alarm History faceplate is used in
Alarm History Faceplate application.
page 77

Set Visible Rows for Equipment Optional Step


Status Faceplate Complete if Equipment Status faceplate is used
in application.
page 79

Create Specific Application Logic

page 82

Are you familiar with


the Logix Designer application
Application Logic Creation Steps Using No programming environment, Yes Application Logic Creation Steps Using
Application Logic Examples motion instructions, and Template
programming
page 88 PowerFlex drives? page 99

Verify and Save the Project File

page 99

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 73


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Import the Preconfigured Logix Designer Project


Follow these steps to open the preconfigured RSLogix 5000 or Studio 5000 Logix Designer project. This
procedure is written for the Logix Designer application, but RSLogix 5000 software is similar.

1. From the Start menu, launch the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.

The Studio 5000® dialog box opens.


2. Under the Create menu, click From Import.

3. Navigate to the Logic directory within the DMAT project.

If the Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit was installed in the default directory you will find the XML
file in: C:\Documents and Settings\My Documents\DMAT\ProjectName\MachineName.

74 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

For the Widg-O-matic example, the path is:


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\D-Wizard\WidgOmatic\WidgOmatic\Logic.
4. Select the logic xml file and Click Open.
5. From the Revision pull-down menu, choose the version of RSLogix 5000 software, versions 18, 19, or 20,
or the Logix Designer application, version 21 or later, to import into.

IMPORTANT RSLogix 5000 software must be version 19.0 or later. RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.0 or later, is required to configure
Kinetix 350 servo drives and when using ControlLogix 1756-L7xS controllers.

6. Click Import to save and open the project as an ACD file.


After the import process is complete, the project opens and the
controller organizer displays all of the preconfigured project
components including the controller, network, device configurations,
the preconfigured logic program files, and the faceplate and control
AOI files.
From this point on, you complete the logic module configuration for
your specific drives and motion application guided by the remaining
sections of this chapter.
To gain a complete understanding of the preconfigured project
organization and logic refer to Appendix A on page 225.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 75


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Complete Drive and Motor Configuration


The DMAT Wizard uses default values for module properties (creating your axes) and axis properties
(configuring your axes). When your application requires modifications to these fields, refer to the appropriate
steps in Appendix G.
Changing Default Properties in Appendix G
Procedure Go To Do This
Complete CIP motion drive module configuration step 19 on page 320 Calculate and enter a value for the Bus Capacitance field.
Complete CIP motion axis properties step 8 on page 324 Review the Scaling, Load, and Actions categories. Make changes, if necessary.
Complete sercos drive module configuration step 13 on page 328 Calculate and enter a value for the Additional Bus Capacitance field.
Complete sercos drive axis properties step 8 on page 330 Review the Motor Feedback, Units, Conversion, and Fault Actions tabs. Make changes, if necessary.

Setting Drive Motor Ratings


You must manually change the motor series and motor type for each axis imported into your Logix Designer
project file. The DMAT Wizard Logix Designer import file sets all drive motor type selections to Rotary, MPL,
and to the largest available power rating as default. This is true even if you change the motor series and type in the
DMAT Wizard. Those selections are reflected in the BOM only.

Follow these steps to edit the Drive/Motor tab.

1. Under My_MotionGroup in the Controller Organizer,


double-click the Servo_Drive_x_Axis.
In the WidgOmatic example, Gantry_X_Axis was selected.

2. In the Axis Properties window, select


Motor in the Categories tree.
3. Click Change Catalog.

The Change Catalog Number dialog


box opens.
4. Scroll though the available catalog numbers and select the desired
motor catalog number for your actual hardware configuration.
5. Click OK.
6. Repeat for each axis configured in My_MotionGroup.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

Set String Tag Names for Alarm History Faceplate


If you plan to use the Alarm History faceplate with your HMI application, follow these steps to set the
application and device string tag names to match your application and device module names. These string names
are used within the alarm messages indicating the device or application origin of the alarm.

1. Expand the Controller folder in your Controller Organizer and double-click Controller Tags.
The controller tags open in the workspace.

2. Expand one of your application status tags (UDT_AppStatus) and/or module status tags
(UDT_ModuleStatus) and select the value field of the string tag named XXX.Name.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the Assembly tag (UDT_AppStatus data type) is expanded
and the Assembly.Name string tag value field is selected.

3. Click .
The String Browser dialog box opens.
4. Type the name of the associated application
or device module.
This string name is used within the alarm
history messages providing the fault origin.

5. Click OK.
The string tag value field updates with the name you typed in. For the Widg-O-matic application example,
the value is Assembly.

6. Repeat step 1 through step 5 for each application status (UDT_AppStatus) tag and device status
(UDT_ModuleStatus) tag within the Controller Tags of your project.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 77


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

For the Widg-O-matic application example, these application and device string tag names were entered.

Packaging

Conveyor_Drive

Diverter_Drive

Gantry_X_Drive

Gantry_Y_Drive

78 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

Set Visible Rows for Equipment Status Faceplate


If you plan to use the Equipment Status faceplate with your HMI application, follow these steps to set the
Inp_NumRowsVis tag value within the faceplate AOI of the device you intend to place in the first row.

1. Determine how many of the nine available rows you will use in the Equipment Status faceplate.
Refer to Chapter 5 beginning on page 101 for an overview of the faceplate so you can determine how many
status rows you require and what device you would like to place in the first row.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, all four devices are included in the Equipment Status
faceplate, with the Gantry X Axis placed in the first row.
• Gantry X Axis
• Gantry Y Axis
• Conveyor
• Diverter
2. Open the R02_Monitor routine for the device located in the first row of the Equipment Status faceplate
and navigate to the device specific faceplate AOI.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the R04_Monitor routine in the P04_Gantry_X_Drive
program was opened.

3. Click (View Configuration Dialog) to open the AOI properties.


4. Navigate to the Inp_NumRowsVis tag and
select the Value.
5. Enter the number of devices you
determined in step 1.
For the Widg-O-matic application
example, 4 was entered.
6. Click OK to close AOI properties and
complete the update.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 79


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Set Visible Rows for Equipment Status Faceplate for Energy Monitoring
If you plan to use the Equipment Status faceplate with Energy Monitoring in your HMI application, follow these
steps to set the Inp_NumRowsVis tag value within the energy object AOI of the device you intend to place in the
first row.

1. Determine how many of the nine available rows you will use in the Equipment Status faceplate for Energy.
Refer to Chapter 5 on page 145 for an overview of the faceplate so you can determine how many status
rows you require and what device you would like to place in the first row.
2. Open the controller tags and expand the energy object tag for the device located in the first row of the
Equipment Status faceplate for Energy (DriveName_BEO).

3. Enter the number of required rows as the tag value for the Inp_NumRowsVis attribute.
In this example, the number of required rows is 5.

IMPORTANT You must use the device module routines with energy support if you plan to use the equipment status faceplate for energy
monitoring.

80 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

Set MSG Path in the E3 Plus Energy Monitoring Routine


If the device modules with energy monitoring are used, an additional routine is included in the device program
named R05_Energy. This routine gathers the energy data and energy related status and stores the data in the base
energy object tag (UDT_BEO).

Rung 2 of the energy routine includes at least one explicit message for getting energy attributes from the device
(some devices require more than one explicit message). The path for each MSG instruction is configured on
import of the device module. However, for E3 Plus device modules, the path must be configured to include the
port number of the 193-DNENCAT device (3) and the node address of the E3 Plus overload relay.

Follow these steps to configure the path for your E3 Plus device:

1. Click the ellipse button on the MSG instruction in rung 2 to launch the Message Configuration dialog
box.
2. Click the Communication tab.
3. Add the 193-DNENCAT port number and your E3 Plus node address to your path configuration in the
following format: _DeviceName, 3, #.
4. Click OK.

Rung 4 of the energy routine monitors the energy rate and sets a status bit if the value exceeds the high alarm
limit. The high-alarm limit default setting is 100. Configure this value to set the kW high-alarm limit for your
device.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 81


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Create Specific Application Logic


Now that you have imported and configured all of the machine, application, and device modules, you can begin
creating the specific application logic for your machine. You create your application logic within the
R10_ApplicationCode routine of the application module. There are two methods for creating specific
application logic for your machine.

The first method involves selecting and importing preprogrammed logic examples into the Application Code
routine. These logic examples help familiarize less experienced users with the basics behind motion instructions
and/or controlling PowerFlex drives via their add-on profiles. These preprogrammed logic examples are designed
to work seamlessly with the application module and can help further reduce programming time.

The second method provides a blank template with placeholders if you choose to write your application-specific
logic from scratch. This method is recommended for users who feel comfortable with the Studio 5000 Logix
Designer programming environment and who also have experience with motion instructions and/or controlling
PowerFlex drives via their add-on profiles.

Application Code Logic Template Overview


To assist you in creating specific-application logic that interfaces with the preconfigured machine, application,
and device modules, a logic template is included in the R10_ApplicationCode routine of the application module.
It includes placeholders for both run and stop sequences. All of the application logic examples also follow this
same template.

IMPORTANT Program the stop sequence to make sure all active devices are properly stopped.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

Run Sequence Template

============================================

BY DEFAULT THE FOLLOWING RUNGS WILL BE ERRORED AND THEREFORE MUST BE ADDRESSED...

MODIFY OR OVERWRITE THESE RUNGS WITH THE APPLICATION SPECIFIC LOGIC

***PLEASE NOTE THE STOP SEQUNCE IS LOCATED DIRECTLY BELOW THE RUN SEQUENCE***

============================================

0 NOP
============================================

RUN SEQUNCE
============================================

1 NOP

e SEQUENCE INITIATE
e
e This rung is a placeholder where Application specific logic can be inserted.
e
e By default, RunSEQ[0] is initially set to 1 following a Machine START command (i.e. "MachineName".Cmd.START).
e Refer to the Machine Commands rungs located in the R03_Control routine of the Application Module.
e EQU
2 e Equal
e Source A RunSEQ[0]
e 0 MOV
e Source B 1 Move
e Logic Placeholder Source 10
e
e Dest RunSEQ[0]
e 0
e
e SEQUENCE PLACEHOLDER
e
e This rung is a placeholder where Application specific logic can be inserted.
e This rung can easily be duplicated if addtional sequence steps are needed.
e EQU
3 e Equal
e Source A RunSEQ[0]
e 0 MOV
e Source B 10 Move
e Source 20
e
e Dest RunSEQ[0]
e 0
e
e SEQUENCE PLACEHOLDER
e
e This rung is a placeholder where Application specific logic can be inserted.
e This rung can easily be duplicated if addtional sequence steps are needed.
e EQU
4 e Equal
e Source A RunSEQ[0]
e 0 MOV
e Source B 20 Move
e Source 30
e
e Dest RunSEQ[0]
e 0
e

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 83


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

The run sequence is initiated by a machine START command via the start logic in the R03_Control routine of
the application module. By default, the run sequence is initiated by placing a value of 1 in the RunSEQ[0] tag.
When the RunSEQ[0] tag is set to 1, the first step in the run sequence is executed, starting the run sequence.
Each of the rungs in the run sequence provides a placeholder where you can insert application-specific step logic.
The Run-sequence logic may include, for example, motion instructions, drive commands, and/or other
conditional diagnostic logic.

The move (MOV) instruction is a placeholder to advance the run sequence to the next step by incrementing the
RunSEQ[0] tag. Each step in the run sequence requires a unique value assigned in ascending order. The steps
typically increase by multiples of five or ten. By default, the run-sequence template steps 1…10…20…30, and so
on. Before moving to the next step, a predetermined condition must normally be met to make sure the current
step is complete.

First Run Sequential Step Example

This Widg-O-matic application code first-run step (RunSEQ[0] = 1) example includes a motion axis move
(MAM) instruction, an instruction error detection check, and an process complete (PC) check. Before the
MOV instruction indexes to the next sequence step (for example, value 5 into RunSEQ[0] tag), the PC check
must be met indicating that the move is complete. The instruction error detection check is used to detect a
module fault in the application, preventing the run sequence from inadvertently hanging on a step.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

Final Run Sequential Step Example

Much like the first run-step example rung, this Widg-O-matic final run step example also includes a motion axis
move (MAM) instruction, an instruction error detection check, and an process complete (PC) check. The only
difference is that the PC bit is used to reset the RunSEQ[0] tag back to a value of 1, which repeats the motion
sequential steps for continuous operation. If continuous operation is not required, the final step could just simply
end the Run Sequence or just remain at this step indefinitely.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 85


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Stop Sequence Template

============================================

STOP SEQUENCE

============================================

5 NOP

e SEQUENCE INITIATE
e
e This rung is a placeholder where Application specific logic can be inserted.
e
e By default, StopSEQ[0] is initially set to 1 following a Machine STOP command (i.e. "MachineName".Cmd.STOP).
e Refer to the Machine Commands rungs located in the R03_Control routine of the Application Module.
e EQU
6 e Equal
e Source A StopSEQ[0]
e 0 MOV
e Source B 1 Move
e Logic Placeholder Source 10
e
e Dest StopSEQ[0]
e 0
e
e SEQUENCE PLACEHOLDER
e
e This rung is a placeholder where Application specific logic can be inserted.
e This rung can easily be dulpicated if addtional sequence steps are needed.
e EQU
7 e Equal
e Source A StopSEQ[0]
e 0 MOV
e Source B 10 Move
e Source 20
e
e Dest StopSEQ[0]
e 0
e
e SEQUENCE COMPLETE

By default, the Application is STOPPED when StopSEQ[0] reaches 999.


Refer to the Application Status rungs located in the R02_Monitor routine of the Application module to modify the
conditions that detemine when the Application is STOPPED (i.e. "ApplicationName".Stopped).
EQU MOV
8 Equal Move
Source A StopSEQ[0] Source 999
0
Source B 20 Dest StopSEQ[0]
0

(End)

The stop sequence is initiated by a machine STOP command via the stop logic in the R03_Control routine of
the application module. By default, the stop sequence is initiated by placing a value of 1 in the StopSEQ[0] tag.
When the StopSEQ[0] tag is set to 1, the first step in the stop sequence is executed, starting the stop sequence.
Each of the rungs in stop sequence provides a placeholder where application specific step logic can be inserted.
The stop sequence logic may include, for example, motion instructions, drive commands and/or other
conditional diagnostic logic.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

The move (MOV) instruction is a placeholder to advance the stop sequence to the next step by incrementing the
StopSEQ[0] tag. Each step in the stop sequence requires a unique value be assigned in ascending order. The steps
typically increase by multiples of five or ten. By default, the stop sequence-template steps 1…10…20…30 …999.
Before moving to the next step, a predetermined condition must normally be met to make sure the current step is
complete.

By default, the stop sequence ends when the StopSEQ[0] tag value reaches 999. The StopSEQ[0] tag is then
monitored in the R02_Monitor routine of the application module for a value of 999 and then sets the
ApplicationName.Stopped tag. The machine module monitors the ApplicationName.Stopped tag to determine
when the application was properly stopped.

First Stop Sequential Step Example

This Widg-O-matic first-stop step example includes two motion axis stop (MAS) instructions, an instruction
error detection check, and axis stopped check. Before the MOV instructions indexes to the next sequence step
(for example, value 10 into the StopSEQ[0] tag), both axes must be stopped. An error detection check is used to
detect a module fault in the application module, preventing the stop sequence from inadvertently hanging on a
step.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 87


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Final Stop Sequential Step and Sequence Complete Example

This Widg-O-matic final-stop step and complete logic example includes logic to disable the two axes and
confirm that the axes are disabled before confirming the application is stopped. Identical to the stop-sequence
template, the stop-sequence complete rung sets the StopSEQ[0] tag value to 999 which indicates the stop
sequence is complete.

Application Logic Creation Steps Using Application Logic Examples


If you are unfamiliar with Rockwell Automation’s general Logix5000™ commands, Logix5000 motion
commands, PowerFlex parameters, and/or are seeking common application methods for creating specific
application logic, use these steps to create your specific application logic.

Toolkit Application Logic Example Overview

The toolkit provides a variety of common application logic examples designed to help you create your specific
application logic. The logic examples are organized by the device modules they support.
• K300 Logic Examples – Supporting Kinetix 300 Ethernet drives
• Motion Logic Examples – Supporting CIP Motion, sercos, and virtual motion drives
• PF Logic Examples – Supporting all PowerFlex drives
• Widg-O-matic Example – Supporting a combination of two Kinetix 6500 CIP Motion drives, one
PowerFlex 753 drive, and one Kinetix 300 Ethernet drive.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

Kinetix 300 Logic Examples


Application Example File Name Description

EIP Position K300_EIPMove_App Enter position, speed, and accel/decel rates to perform incremental position moves.

EIP Velocity K300_EIPVel_App Run Kinetix 300 drive at a speed reference.


Index K300_Index_App Configure and run Kinetix 300 drive in indexing mode.

Motion Logic Examples


Application Example File Name Description
2-Axis Gear Motion_Gear_App Gear two axes together.
Adv/Retard Phasing Motion_Jog_PhaseMove_App Perform advance/retard phase moves with a MAM instruction on top of MAJ instruction.
2-Axis PCAM Motion_PCAM_App Jog an axis and Position Cam another axis to it.
Simple Move Motion_Simple_Move_App Move single axis with MAM instruction by using incremental moves.
Safe Limited Speed Motion_SLS_App For single axis, monitor SLS request in module. Reduce speed when SLS request detected.
TCAM Motion_TCAM_App Time Cam an axis.

PowerFlex Logic Examples


Application Example File Name Description
Run Forward / Reverse PF_Fwd_Rev_App Run PowerFlex drive forward, stop, and then run reverse.
Run at Speed PF_Run_Spd_App Run PowerFlex drive at a speed reference.
PF525 Run Forward / Reverse PF525Only_Fwd_Rev_App.L5X Run PowerFlex drive forward, stop, and then run reverse.
PF525 Run at Speed PF525Only_Run_Spd_App.L5X Run PowerFlex drive at a speed reference.

Widg-O-matic Logic Examples


Application Example File Name Description Application Created From
Widg-O-Matic Assembly WOm_Assy_App1 Execute 2-axis simple moves for gantry. Motion_Simple_Move_App
Intermittently run PowerFlex drive for conveyor and PF_Run_Spd_App
Widg-O-Matic Packaging WOm_Pack_App2 execute Kinetix 300 position commands for diverter. K300_EIPMove_App

ArmorStart and ArmorStart LT Examples


Application Example File Name Description
Run Forward AS2X0E_Fwd_App Run ArmorStart forward.
Run Forward/Reverse AS2X1E_Fwd_Rev_App Run ArmorStart forward, stop and then run reverse.
Run For/Rev at Speed AS2X4E_Fwd_Rev_App (at speed) Run ArmorStart forward, stop and then run reverse at a speed reference.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 89


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Widg-O-matic Logic Example Overview

To assist you in understanding how to best use the logic examples, the Widg-O-matic machine application is
used as an example.

We recommend you study the Widg-O-matic assembly and packaging applications to see the interaction of the
machine, application, and device modules within the application logic. The Widg-O-matic examples are created
by using basic drives and motion application examples included in the toolkit. After you’ve studied these
examples, create your own applications using the basic drives and motion examples.

The Widg-O-matic application example is an excellent canvas to experiment with the other application
examples. The Widg-O-matic example includes two servo axes, one PowerFlex drive, and one Kinetix 300 drive.
So, it is possible for you to import and study all of the application examples.
Widg-O-matic Machine Application Example

Assembly

X-Y Gantry

X-Servo
Packaging

Y-Servo Conveyor

or
on Mot
ucti
Ind

Diverter
ven
Dri er
otor lind
M Cy
vo ric
Ser Elect
300

755

Kinetix 6500 PowerFlex 753 Kinetix 300


Drives Drive Drive

90 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

The Widg-O-matic machine example has two applications (assembly and packaging) and has the following run
sequences.
Assembly Application
Step Simple X-Y Gantry Run Sequence Value
1 Lower Y-axis, incremental distance 2.0 revs
2 Dwell, time 1.0 s
3 Raise Y-axis, incremental distance 2.0 revs
4 Extend X-axis, incremental distance 3.0 revs
5 Lower Y-axis, incremental distance 2.0 revs
6 Dwell, time 1.0 s
7 Raise Y-axis, incremental distance 2.0 revs
8 Retract X-axis, incremental distance 3.0 revs
9 Repeat and run continuously until the stop sequence is initiated by a machine abort or stop command.

Packaging Application
Step Conveyor and Diverter Run Sequence Drive
1 Verify diverter is in EIP Incremental Position mode Kinetix 300
2 Set conveyor drive direction forward and speed reference at 50 Hz PowerFlex 753
3 Enable diverter Kinetix 300
4 Configure diverter position, speed, accel/decel and start an incremental move Kinetix 300
5 Start conveyor, run at speed 3.0 seconds PowerFlex 753
6 Stop conveyor PowerFlex 753
7 Configure diverter position, speed, accel/decel and start an incremental move Kinetix 300
8 Start conveyor, run at speed 4.0 seconds PowerFlex 753
9 Stop conveyor PowerFlex 753
10 Repeat and run continuously until the stop sequence is initiated by a machine abort or stop command.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 91


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Import Application Logic Examples

Follow these steps to add logic examples to your R10_ApplicationCode routine within your application
modules.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in the Controller Organizer.


2. Navigate to and open the R10_ApplicationCode routine within your first application program file.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the R10_ApplicationCode routine within the P02_Assembly
program was opened.

3. Select all rungs of the R10_ ApplicationCode routine.


4. Right-click the selected rungs and choose Import Rungs.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

5. Navigate to the 02_Application Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\02_Application Logic.
6. Double-click the logic examples folder of choice.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the Widg-O-matic_Logic_Examples folder was opened.
7. Select the desired logic example file to start your application logic.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the WOm_Assy_App1.L5X file is selected.


8. Check Overwrite Selected Rungs.
9. Click Import.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 93


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

10. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.


The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

11. Replace tag names in the Final Name column with the associated axis or drive names for your application.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, _X_AxisName was replaced with Gantry_X_Axis and
_Y_AxisName was replaced with Gantry_Y_Axis.
12. Click OK to complete rung import.
13. Repeat step 2 through step 12 for each logic example you wish to import.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

For the Widg-O-matic Assembly application example, the following rungs are imported. The rungs include a
series of five incremental moves.
Sercos/CIP Motion Simple Incremental Move

============================================================================================
============================================

SERCOS / CIP MOTION


SIMPLE INCREMENTAL MOVE

The following application example demonstrates how to control a SERCOS / CIP MOTION drive using sequencers &
Motion Instructions.
While the Machine is STARTING / RUNNING, the drive will be operated as follows:

1) Lower Y-Axis - Incremental Distance -2.0 revs


2) DWELL - Time 1 sec
3) Raise Y-Axis - Incremental Distance 2.0 revs
4) Extend X-Axis - Incremental Distance 3.0 revs
5) Lower Y-Axis - Incremental Distance -2.0 revs
5) DWELL - Time 1 sec
6) Raise Y-Axis - Incremental Distance 2.0 revs
7) Retract X-Axis- Incremental Distance -3.0 revs
8) Repeat

The Run Sequence is continuously repeated until the Stop Sequence is initiated by a Machine ABORT or STOP
command.

============================================================================================

0 NOP

============================================================================================
============================================

RUN SEQUENCE

============================================================================================
============================================

1 NOP

INCREMENTAL MOVE

Lower Y-Axis
Incremental Distance -2.0 revs
Motion Axis Move
EQU MAM
2 Equal Motion Axis Move EN
Source A RunSEQ[0] Axis Gantry_Y_Axis ...
0 Motion Control Gantry_Y_Axis_Ctrl.MI.MAM[1] DN
Source B 1 Move Type 1
ER
Position -2
IP
Speed Gantry_Y_Axis_Ctrl.Data.MoveSpd[1]
1.0 PC
Speed Units Units per sec
Accel Rate Gantry_Y_Axis_Ctrl.Data.MoveAccel[0]
50.0
Accel Units % of Maximum
Decel Rate Gantry_Y_Axis_Ctrl.Data.MoveDecel[0]
50.0
Decel Units % of Maximum
Profile Trapezoidal

14. Repeat step 1 through step 12 for every application program you have in your drives and motion system.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 95


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the R10_ApplicationCode routine within the P03_Packaging
program was also opened and the WOm_Pack_App2.L5X file was imported.

96 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

For the Widg-O-matic WOm_Pack_App2.L5X file import, the PowerFlex 753 faceplate
_Conveyor_DriveName is replaced with Conveyor_Drive and the Kinetix 300 input, output, and control
tag _Diverter_DriveName are replaced with Diverter_Drive.

IMPORTANT For application examples with Kinetix 300 devices, it is required that you also configure the component reference tag name
for the Kinetix 300 drive.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 97


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

For the Widg-O-matic packaging example, the following rungs are imported. The rungs include a series of
incremental moves for the Kinetix 300 Diverter_Drive and Start/Stop and Speed reference commands for the
PowerFlex Conveyor_Drive.
Kinetix 300 and PowerFlex Drives Incremental Move
============================================

K300/POWERFLEX
K300- EIP POSITION MODE
POWERFLEX-RUN FORWARD
Widg-O-Matic Packaging Example

The following application example demonstrates how to control a K300 and a PowerFlex drive using sequencers.

Note that the K300 MUST be in EIP Incremental Position mode ( EIP mode = 1, Reference Source = 2)
For this example, the mode is set in the K300 Module Reset Sequence. Tag K300_Ctrl.Cmd.DriveMode is set to 2.

The Run sequence will Configure and run incremental position moves using K300 EIP Move AOI and Set a speed
reference
and Start/Stop a PowerFlex Drive.
While the Machine is STARTING / RUNNING, the drives will be operated as follows:

1) Verify K300 is in EIP Incremental Position mode.


1) Set Direction FWD, Speed Reference 50 Hz
2) Enable K300 drive.
3) Configure Position, Speed, Accel/Decel and start an Incremental Move.
2) Start drive, run at speed 3 sec
3) Stop drive
4) Configure Position, Speed, Accel/Decel and start an Incremental Move.
2) Start drive, run at speed 4 sec
3) Stop drive
6) Repeat

The Run Sequence is continuously repeated until the Stop Sequence is initiated by a Machine ABORT or STOP
command.

============================================================================================
============================================

0 NOP

============================================================================================
============================================

RUN SEQUENCE

============================================================================================
============================================

1 NOP

SET K300 MODE


Set drive mode specific for this application.
This tag is used in Reset Routine in K300 Drive module to set Mode.
K300 Drive Mode for
application
MOV
2 Move
Source 2

Dest Diverter_Drive_Ctrl.Data.AppMode
2

98 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Configuration Chapter 4

Application Logic Creation Steps Using Template


If you are familiar with Rockwell Automation’s general Logix5000 commands, Logix5000 motion commands,
PowerFlex parameters, and have a good idea of your specific run/stop sequences, use these steps to guide you
through your specific application logic creation.

1. Formulate and list your run sequence steps.


2. Add your initial run sequence step (RunSEQ[0] = 1) to the R10_ApplicationCode routine of your
imported application module.
3. Add remaining run sequence steps (RunSEQ[0] > 1) and interlocks to remaining R10_ApplicationCode
routine rungs and adding run sequence rungs as required.
4. Formulate and list your stop sequence steps.
5. Add your initial stop sequence step (StopSEQ[0] = 1) to the R10_ApplicationCode routine of your
imported application module.
6. Add remaining stop sequence steps (1 < StopSEQ[0] < 999) and interlocks to remaining
R10_ApplicationCode routine rungs and adding stop sequence rungs as required.
7. Add your final stop sequence step (StopSEQ[0] = 999) to the R10_ApplicationCode routine of your
imported application module.
8. Determine any special reset logic requirements for your application and edit the R04_Reset Routine in the
application module. Refer to Appendix B on page 241 for more information on logic module
customization.
For other common application code requirements, not included in preprogrammed application modules
or logic examples, refer to Appendix B on page 241.

Verify and Save the Project File


1. Click on the Logix Designer application toolbar to verify your controller.
This software function verifies your controller programs and displays errors/warnings, if any.
2. Make corrections to programs as needed.

IMPORTANT If a PowerFlex 70 drive is used as part of the Low Voltage Drive configuration, you need to manually set the data type for
each PowerFlex 70 drive AOI.

3. Click to save your Logix Designer project file.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 99


Chapter 4 Logic Configuration

Notes:

100 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Chapter 5

FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

In this chapter you create the operator interface application file for your system using FactoryTalk View Studio
software. The toolkit includes a variety of preconfigured machine and device faceplate displays providing status,
control, and diagnostics for your drives and motion system. Like the logic modules, the faceplates are designed to
be used independently of each other or assembled together based on your specific application requirements.

Machine Startup Faceplate Display


This display provides overall machine status and
control. It may also be used as the main
navigation display for access to the other device,
Alarm History, and Equipment Status faceplate
displays in your application.

Machine State Diagram Faceplate Display


This display provides a graphical machine state status
and is configured to fit within the middle section of the
Startup display when launched from the State Diagram
Goto display button.

This display is sized for use with PanelView Plus 700, or


larger, terminals.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 101


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Device Faceplate Display Example

• The device faceplates are complex displays providing status, control, and fault diagnostic views for a specific device.
• The toolkit includes device faceplates for CIP Motion, Sercos interface, PowerFlex, Kinetix 300, SMC-50, E300, and E3 Plus overload
relay (with 193-DNENCAT) devices.
• This example shows specific views for the CIP Motion faceplate, other devices are similar, however, differences do exist.
CIP Motion Drive
Axis Status View

Axis Home View

CIP Motion Drive

CIP Motion Drive


Axis Control View

Press the Alarm button for fault


diagnostic view.

CIP Motion Drive

Press the Help button for additional fault


diagnostic views.

CIP Motion Drive CIP Motion Drive

Press arrows to
toggle between
displays.

Energy Monitoring
Two versions of the faceplates for the E3 Plus, E300, SMC-50, PF755,
PF753 and PF7 series faceplates are provided, one with and one without
energy monitoring. The faceplate with energy monitoring includes an
Energy tab. The Energy tab provides kWh and kW values along with
information on the type of energy being monitored (Resource Type), and
how the values are being generated (Capabilities).

102 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Alarm History Faceplate Display


The Alarm History display provides time and date stamped
machine and device faults and alarms.
This display is sized for use in PanelView Plus 700 or larger
terminals.

Equipment Status Faceplate Display


This Equipment Status display provides a summary
status of the devices in your system and a launch site for
your individual device faceplate displays.
This display is sized for use in PanelView Plus 700
or larger terminals.

Equipment Status Faceplate for Energy Monitoring Display


In addition to the standard Equipment Status Faceplate, an additional
equipment status faceplate is provided specifically for displaying energy
related status. This Equipment Status display for Energy Monitoring
provides an energy status summary of the devices in your system and a
launch site for your individual device faceplate displays.
This display is sized for use in PanelView Plus 700 or larger terminals.

Before You Begin


• Complete your logic configuration (refer to Chapter 4) or
• Complete Appendix G

What You Need


• The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.
• FactoryTalk View Studio software, version 5.1 or later.
• The user manual for FactoryTalk View Studio, Volume 1. Refer to the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition
User's Guide, publication VIEWME-UM004.
• The user manual for FactoryTalk View Studio, Volume 2. Refer to the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition
User's Guide, publication VIEWME-UM005.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 103


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Follow These Steps


This chapter provides two HMI application configuration options:
• Designing from a preconfigured HMI application file
• Designing from an existing HMI application file

Complete these steps to create your Logix5000 controller logic for your drives and motion application.

Start

Yes Are you creating a new No


Design From a Preconfigured HMI Design From an Existing HMI
HMI application file for Application File
Application File your system?
• Open FactoryTalk View ME Configuration page 104 page 117 • Open Your Existing HMI Application File
Guide and Add Displays
• Restore and Open a Preconfigured HMI • Add Parameter Files
Application • Configure Parameter Files
• Delete Unused Displays • Import Alarm Setup File
• Delete Unused Parameter Files • Delete Unused Alarm Triggers
• Configure Parameter Files • Import and Edit Alarm Tags
• Delete Unused Alarm Triggers and Tags Configure Goto Display Buttons on
Startup Display

page 133

Configure Equipment Status


Faceplate Display

page 138

Design From a Preconfigured HMI Application File


If you are creating a new HMI application file for your system, use this section to configure your application file.
Using the preconfigured HMI application file is the most efficient way to create your application file. It includes
all of the displays, parameter files, and alarm setup-tags and messages required for all faceplates and devices.

If your existing HMI application file is not too extensive, it may still be more efficient to start from the
preconfigured HMI application file and copy your existing application displays, parameter files, and alarm
messages. Otherwise, follow the steps in Design From an Existing HMI Application File starting on page 117.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Open FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Guide


If the DMAT Wizard was used to create the initial system configuration, then there is a corresponding
FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Guide for your project to assist you in designing your FactoryTalk View
ME application.

1. Navigate to your project's FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Guide.


If the default DMAT Wizard directory was used, you will find your project's FactoryTalk View ME
Configuration Guide Microsoft Word doc in C:\Documents and Settings\PC Name\
My Documents\DMAT\ProjectName\MachineName\FactoryTalkViewMEConfigurationGuide
directory.
The Widg-O-matic example file may be found in:
C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\6-Project Examples\Widg-O-matic.
2. Open the guide and use it for
assistance in the completing the Factory Talk View ME Configuration Guide
remaining steps in this section. This guide was created based on your DMAT Wizard selections and is meant to assist you in designing your
Factory Talk View ME application using the DMAT Pre-configured HMI application files. Use this document as a
supplement to the Design From a Preconfigured HMI Application File section in Chapter 5 of the Drives and Motor
Your project file name will be: Accelerator Toolkit Quick Start guide, IASIMP-QS019A-EN-P.

ProjectName FactoryTalk View ME This document will define specific steps to help you:
Restore and Open a Preconfigured HMI Application
Delete Unused Displays
Configuration. Delete Unused Parameter Files
Configure Parameter Files
Delete Unused Alarm Triggers and Tags
Configure Goto Display Buttons on Startup Display
Configure Equipment Status Faceplate Display

Design From a Preconfigured HMI Application File

Restore and Open a Preconfigured HMI Application

1. Navigate to the Panelview Plus 1000 folder

2. Double-click the PVP1000_Application.apa archive file

Delete Unused Displays


List of Required Faceplates

[ALARM]
[DIAGNOSTICS]
[INFORMATION]
CIPMotion Faceplate
K300_Faceplate
PowerFlex_753_755_Faceplate
PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate
PVP1000_StateDiagram_Faceplate
PVP1000_AlarmHistory_Faceplate
PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate

Delete Unused Parameter Files


List of Required Parameter Files

CIPMotion_Parameter
K300_Parameter
PF_Parameter
Startup_Parameter
StateDiagram_Parameter
EquipmentStatus_Parameter

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 105


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Restore and Open a Preconfigured HMI Application


Follow these steps to restore the preconfigured HMI file and open in FactoryTalk View Studio software.

1. Navigate to the HMI application files within the toolkit’s file folder and open either the
PanelView Plus 1000 or PanelView Plus 600 folder, based on the terminal size and faceplate requirements
of your application.

IMPORTANT The Equipment Status faceplate is compatible with PanelView Plus 700 or larger terminals. To take full advantage of all
faceplates, choose the PanelView Plus 1000 folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\5-HMI\ME\HMI Applications.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the PanelView Plus 1000 folder was selected.
PanelView Plus Terminal and Faceplates Compatibility
Application Folder PanelView Plus Terminals Supported Faceplates Displays
• Machine Startup Display
• PanelView Plus 400 • Machine State Diagram Display
PVP600 • PanelView Plus 600 • All Device Displays
• Alarm History Display

• PanelView Plus 700 • Machine Startup Display


• PanelView Plus 1000 • Machine State Diagram Display
PVP1000 • All Device Displays
• PanelView Plus 1250 (1)
• Alarm History Display
• PanelView Plus 1500 (1) • Equipment Status Display
(1) The PanelView Plus 1000 Machine, Alarm History, and Equipment Status faceplate displays are sized at 640x480 (VGA) resolution. If full-sized displays are desired, open
display, select all (objects), group, and resize group. Some text editing for new display size may also be required.

2. Double-click the PVPxxxx_Application.apa archive file.


For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the PVP1000_Application.apa file was opened.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

The Application Manager dialog box opens.

3. Verify the application archive to restore and that Restore the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition
application is selected.

IMPORTANT Selecting Restore the FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application and FactoryTalk Local Directory causes the local
security settings on your personal computer to substitute for the security setting from the preconfigured application.

4. Click Next.

5. Rename the application to match your machine name.


For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the application name is Widg_O_Matic.
6. Click Finish.
7. From the Start menu, select Programs>FactoryTalk View Studio.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 107


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

The New/Open Machine Edition Application dialog box opens.

8. From the Existing tab, select the application file that you just restored.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, Widg_O_Matic
is selected.
9. Click Open.
The application opens in FactoryTalk View Studio software.

Delete Unused Displays


Follow these steps to remove displays not used in your application.

1. Determine the required faceplates for your application based on the Faceplate Displays table.

TIP Only one faceplate display is required for devices/modules of the same type.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Faceplate Displays
Supported PanelView Plus
Faceplate Display Name Parameter File Supported Devices/Modules Terminals
Kinetix 6500, Kinetix 5500, Kinetix 350, PowerFlex 527,
CIPMotion_Faceplate CIPMotion_Parameter and PowerFlex 755 drives configured as CIP Motion drives
E3Plus_Faceplate
E3_Parameter E3 Plus overload relay
E3Plus_Faceplate_Energy
E300_Faceplate
E300_Parameter E300 Electronic overload relays
E300_Faceplate_Energy
K300_Faceplate K300_Parameter Kinetix 300 drives
PowerFlex_4_40_400_Faceplate PowerFlex 4, PowerFlex 40, and PowerFlex 400 drives
PowerFlex_40P_Faceplate PowerFlex 40P drives All
PowerFlex_70_700_Faceplate PowerFlex 70EC and
PowerFlex_70_700_Faceplate_Energy PowerFlex 700VC drives

PowerFlex_700S_700S2_Faceplate
PF_Parameter PowerFlex 700S2 drives
PowerFlex_700S_700S2_Faceplate_Energy
PowerFlex_753_755_Faceplate
PowerFlex 753 and
PowerFlex_753_Faceplate_Energy PowerFlex 755 drives
PowerFlex_755_Faceplate_Energy
PowerFlex_525_Faceplate PowerFlex 525 drives
PVP1000_AlarmHistory_Faceplate Not Required
All devices • PanelView Plus 700
PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate EquipmentStatus_Parameter • PanelView Plus 1000
PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate Startup_Parameter Machine logic module • PanelView Plus 1250 (1)
• PanelView Plus 1500 (1)
PVP1000_StateDiagram_Faceplate StateDiagram_Parameter Machine logic module (states)
• PanelView Plus 400
PVP600_Startup_Faceplate Startup_Parameter Machine logic module • PanelView Plus 600
Kinetix 2000, Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 6000M, Kinetix 6200,
SERCOS_Faceplate SERCOS_Parameter Kinetix 7000, and Ultra3000-SE drives
All
SMC_50_Faceplate
SMC_50_Parameter SMC_50 soft starters
SMC_50_Faceplate_Energy
ArmorStart_280E_Faceplate ArmorStart_280E_Faceplate ArmorStart 280E motor controllers
ArmorStart_281E_Faceplate ArmorStart_281E_Faceplate ArmorStart 281E motor controllers
ArmorStart_284E_Faceplate ArmorStart_284E_Faceplate ArmorStart 284E motor controllers
All
ArmorStart_290E_Faceplate ArmorStart_290E_Faceplate ArmorStart LT 290E motor controllers
ArmorStart_291E_Faceplate ArmorStart_291E_Faceplate ArmorStart LT 291E motor controllers
ArmorStart_294E_Faceplate ArmorStart_294E_Faceplate ArmorStart LT 294E motor controllers
(1) The PanelView Plus 1000 Machine, Alarm History, and Equipment Status faceplate displays are sized at 640x480 (VGA) resolution. If full-sized displays are desired, open display, select all
(objects), group, and resize group. Some text editing for new display size may also be required.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 109


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

For the Widg-O-matic example, these displays are used:


Widg-O-matic Application Example Display Names
PVP1000_AlarmHistory_Faceplate
PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate
PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate
PVP1000_StateDiagram_Faceplate
CIPMotion_Faceplate
K300_Faceplate
PowerFlex_753_755_Faceplate

2. Expand the Displays component under the Graphics folder.

3. Right-click displays not needed in your application and choose Delete.


4. Confirm deleting each un-needed display by clicking Yes.

Delete Unused Parameter Files


Follow these steps to remove parameter files not used in your application.

1. Determine required parameter files for your application based on Faceplate Displays table on page 109.
2. Expand the Parameters component under the Graphics folder.
3. Right-click Parameter files not needed in your application and choose
Delete.
For the Widg-O-Matic example, the SERCOS_Parameter file is deleted.
4. Confirm deleting each un-needed file by clicking Yes.

110 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Configure Parameter Files


Follow these steps to configure a parameter file for each device or logic module in your application supported by
a faceplate.

1. Right-click a parameter file for a device in your application and choose Rename.

2. Rename the parameter file with the name of the corresponding device in your Logix Designer application.

If more than one device uses the same faceplate then another parameter of the same type must be
duplicated and renamed. Refer to step 4 and step 5 on page 112.
For the Widg-O-Matic example, these are the parameter files:
Base Parameter File Name Widg-O-matic Parameter File Name
Gantry_X_Axis
CIPMotion_Parameter
Gantry_Y_Axis
PF_Parameter Conveyor_Drive
K300_Parameter Diverter_Drive
EquipmentStatus_Parameter EquipmentStatus
Startup_Parameter Startup
StateDiagram_Parameter StateDiagram

3. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 111


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

4. To create another parameter file based on an existing one, right-click the


parameter file and choose Duplicate.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, Gantry_X_Axis and
Gantry_Y_Axis use the same CIP_Motion_Faceplate, but require
individual parameter files. For example, Gantry_X_Axis is duplicated and
renamed to Gantry_Y_Axis in step 5.

5. Rename the parameter file as needed for your application.


6. Click OK.
7. Repeat step 1 through step 6 for each device or logic module parameter file.

This is the completed Widg-O-matic renamed parameter file listing.

8. Assign the parameters in each of the parameter files.


In each parameter file, there are references to controller links (shortcuts) or specific tag names. The ‘!’
before any text indicates that line is a comment and each parameter file contains instructions on how to
configure it. The ‘#’ before a number indicates a parameterized tag.

Comments

Parameters

For example, in the Widg-O-matic Gantry_X_Axis parameter file Parameter #1 contains the shortcut
name [CLX]. This should match the shortcut name created in your RSLinx Enterprise communication
setup. Parameter #2 represents the tag name for the specific Faceplate AOI, within your Logix Designer
project, which the faceplate requests data from.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

The Widg-O-matic Gantry_X_Axis parameter #2 is assigned to the faceplate AOI tag named
Gantry_X_Axis_FP found in the R02_Monitor routine of the P04_Gantry_X_Drive program.

a. Double-click the parameter file to open it.

b. Enter your application controller’s shortcut name in all


parameters.

TIP Less editing is required when assigning HMI alarm tags if you name your controller shortcut [CLX]. Refer to Chapter 6 on
page 149 for configuring your controller shortcuts in RSLinx Enterprise communication setup.

c. Enter the associated faceplate AOI tag name of the


device or module for this faceplate parameter.
d. Close parameter file and acknowledge the Save Changes
dialog box.
9. Repeat step 8 for each of your device or module faceplate parameters.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 113


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

For the Widg-O-Matic example, the parameters are edited as follows:

Widg-O-Matic Parameter File Parameter File Configuration


#1=::[CLX]
Gantry_X_Axis
#2=::[CLX]Gantry_X_Axis_FP
#1=::[CLX]
Gantry_Y_Axis
#2=::[CLX]Gantry_Y_Axis_FP
Conveyor_Drive #1=::[CLX]Conveyor_Drive_FP
#1=::[CLX]
Diverter_Drive
#2=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP
#1=::[CLX]Gantry_X_Axis_FP
#2=::[CLX]Gantry_Y_Axis_FP The Equipment Status faceplate requires that
parameters are set for all rows #1…9 even if they
#3=::[CLX]Conveyor_Drive_FP are not visible. Typically, the last visible row
#4=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP parameter is entered in the remaining
parameters. For example, Diverter_Drive_FP
EquipmentStatus #5=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP parameter entered for #4…9.
#6=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP
Refer to Configure Equipment Status Faceplate
#7=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP Display on page 138 for more information.
#8=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP
#9=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP
#1=::[CLX]
Startup
#2=::[CLX]WidgOmatic
StateDiagram #1=::[CLX]WidgOmatic

114 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Delete Unused Alarm Triggers and Tags


Follow these steps to delete any alarm triggers for hardware devices not used in your application. This could
improve performance of your PanelView Plus terminal communication.

IMPORTANT These steps must be completed if a machine module is not used in your Logix Designer project.

1. Expand the Alarms folder.


2. Double-click Alarm Setup.
The Alarm Setup dialog box opens.

3. Click the Triggers tab.


4. Select any unused alarm trigger tags
from the Select trigger organizer.
Unused trigger tags are any
associated devices not configured in
your Logix Designer project.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, these alarm triggers are used, so all other trigger tags can be
removed.
Alarm Triggers Used
PowerFlexAlarmTrigger
ModuleAlarmTrigger
CIPMotionTrigger
K300AlarmTrigger

5. Click Remove.
6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 for all unused trigger tags.
7. Click OK in the Alarm Setup dialog box to save edits.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 115


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

8. Expand the HMI Tags folder and double-click Tags.

The HMI Tags editor appears in the workspace.


9. Select each of the xxxAlarmHandshake, xxxAlarmName, and xxxAlarmTrigger tags associated with each of
the Alarm Triggers that were deleted in the previous steps.
For example, the circled tags are the three tags you would delete if the E3AlarmTrigger had been deleted
previously.

10. Click to delete the tags.


11. Repeat step 8 through step 10 for all unused Alarm tags associated with unused Alarm Triggers.

TIP Less editing is required when assigning HMI


alarm tags if you name your controller
shortcut [CLX]. Refer to Chapter 6 on
page 149 for configuring your controller
shortcuts in RSLinx Enterprise communication
setup.

12. Click Close to complete tag editing.

TIP Because you used the pre-configured HMI file


instructions, you can skip Design From an
Existing HMI Application File, and go directly
to Configure Goto Display Buttons on Startup
Display starting on page 133.

116 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Design From an Existing HMI Application File


If your existing HMI application file is not too extensive, it may still be more efficient to start from the
preconfigured HMI application file and copy your existing application displays, parameter files, and alarm
messages. Refer to Design From a Preconfigured HMI Application File starting on page 104.

Otherwise, follow the steps in this section to add the HMI components to your existing FactoryTalk View
Machine Edition application file.

Open Your Existing HMI Application File and Add Displays


TIP Only one faceplate display is required for devices/modules of the same type.

1. Determine the required faceplates for your application based on the Determine the required faceplates for
your application based on the table. table.
Faceplate Displays
Supported PanelView Plus
Faceplate Display Name Parameter File Supported Devices/Modules Terminals
Kinetix 6500, Kinetix 5500, Kinetix 350, PowerFlex 527,
CIPMotion_Faceplate CIPMotion_Parameter and PowerFlex 755 drives configured as CIP Motion drives
E3Plus_Faceplate
E3_Parameter E3 Plus overload relay
E3Plus_Faceplate_Energy
E300_Faceplate
E300_Parameter E300 Electronic overload relays
E300_Faceplate_Energy
K300_Faceplate K300_Parameter Kinetix 300 drives
PowerFlex_4_40_400_Faceplate PowerFlex 4, PowerFlex 40, and PowerFlex 400 drives
PowerFlex_40P_Faceplate PowerFlex 40P drives All
PowerFlex_70_700_Faceplate PowerFlex 70EC and
PowerFlex_70_700_Faceplate_Energy PowerFlex 700VC drives

PowerFlex_700S_700S2_Faceplate
PF_Parameter PowerFlex 700S2 drives
PowerFlex_700S_700S2_Faceplate_Energy
PowerFlex_753_755_Faceplate
PowerFlex 753 and
PowerFlex_753_Faceplate_Energy PowerFlex 755 drives
PowerFlex_755_Faceplate_Energy
PowerFlex_525_Faceplate PowerFlex 525 drives
PVP1000_AlarmHistory_Faceplate Not Required
All devices • PanelView Plus 700
PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate EquipmentStatus_Parameter • PanelView Plus 1000
PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate Startup_Parameter Machine logic module • PanelView Plus 1250 (1)
• PanelView Plus 1500 (1)
PVP1000_StateDiagram_Faceplate StateDiagram_Parameter Machine logic module (states)
• PanelView Plus 400
PVP600_Startup_Faceplate Startup_Parameter Machine logic module • PanelView Plus 600

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 117


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Faceplate Displays (continued)


Supported PanelView Plus
Faceplate Display Name Parameter File Supported Devices/Modules Terminals
Kinetix 2000, Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 6000M, Kinetix 6200,
SERCOS_Faceplate SERCOS_Parameter Kinetix 7000, and Ultra3000-SE drives
All
SMC_50_Faceplate
SMC_50_Parameter SMC_50 soft starters
SMC_50_Faceplate_Energy
ArmorStart_280E_Faceplate ArmorStart_280E_Faceplate ArmorStart 280E motor controllers
ArmorStart_281E_Faceplate ArmorStart_281E_Faceplate ArmorStart 281E motor controllers
ArmorStart_284E_Faceplate ArmorStart_284E_Faceplate ArmorStart 284E motor controllers
All
ArmorStart_290E_Faceplate ArmorStart_290E_Faceplate ArmorStart LT 290E motor controllers
ArmorStart_291E_Faceplate ArmorStart_291E_Faceplate ArmorStart LT 291E motor controllers
ArmorStart_294E_Faceplate ArmorStart_294E_Faceplate ArmorStart LT 294E motor controllers
(1) The PanelView Plus 1000 Machine, Alarm History, and Equipment Status faceplate displays are sized at 640x480 (VGA) resolution. If full-sized displays are desired, open display, select all
(objects), group, and resize group. Some text editing for new display size may also be required.

2. Launch FactoryTalk View Studio software and open your


existing application file.
For this example, the InstantFizz_ME application file is
opened.
3. Right-click Displays within Graphics folder and select Add
Component Into Application.

118 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

4. Navigate to the HMI Modules folder within the toolkit’s files folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\5-HMI\ME\HMI Modules.
5. Select the folder representing the type of the first faceplate you desire to add.
For this example, the 01_Machine folder was selected for the PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate file.
6. Select the faceplate display file you desire to add.

For this example, the PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate.gfx was selected


7. Click Open.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 119


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

The selected display is added to the Displays folder.

8. Repeat step 3 through step 7 for each faceplate required for your application.

TIP Only one faceplate is required for multiple device/modules of the same type. For example, if your application has two
Kinetix 6500 drives requiring a faceplate, only one CIPMotion_Faceplate.gfx display is required.

120 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Add Parameter Files


1. Determine required parameter files for your application.
Refer to the Determine the required faceplates for your application based on the Determine the required
faceplates for your application based on the table. table. table on page 117 for the parameter file required
for each faceplate.
2. Right-click Parameters within the Graphics folder and select Add Component Into Application.

3. Navigate to the HMI Modules folder within the toolkit’s files folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\5-HMI\ME\HMI Modules.
4. Select the folder representing the type of the first parameter you desire to add.
For this example, the 01_Machine folder was selected for the Startup_Parameter supporting the
PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 121


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

5. Select the parameter file you desire to add.

For this example, Startup_Parameter.par was selected to support the PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate added
earlier.
6. Click Open.
The selected parameter is added to the Parameter folder.

7. Repeat step 2 through step 6 for each parameter file required for your application.

122 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Configure Parameter Files


Follow these steps to configure a parameter file for each device or logic module in your application supported by
a faceplate.

1. Right-click a parameter file for a device in your application and choose Rename.

2. Rename the parameter file with the name of the corresponding device in your Logix Designer application.

If more than one device uses the same faceplate then another parameter of the same type must be
duplicated and renamed. Refer to step 4 and step 5 on page 112.
For the Widg-O-Matic example, these are the parameter files:
Base Parameter File Name Widg-O-matic Parameter File Name
Gantry_X_Axis
CIPMotion_Parameter
Gantry_Y_Axis
PF_Parameter Conveyor_Drive
K300_Parameter Diverter_Drive
EquipmentStatus_Parameter EquipmentStatus
Startup_Parameter Startup
StateDiagram_Parameter StateDiagram

3. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 123


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

4. To create another parameter file based on an existing one, right-click the parameter file and choose
Duplicate.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, Gantry_X_Axis and Gantry_Y_Axis use the same
CIP_Motion_Faceplate, but require individual parameter files. For example, Gantry_X_Axis is duplicated
and renamed to Gantry_Y_Axis in step 5.
5. Rename the parameter file as needed for your application.
6. Click OK.
7. Repeat step 1 through step 6 for each device or logic module parameter file.
This is the completed Widg-O-matic renamed parameter file listing.

8. Assign the parameters in each of the parameter files.

124 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

In each parameter file, there are references to controller links (shortcuts) or specific tag names. The ‘!’
before any text indicates that line is a comment and each parameter file contains instructions on how to
configure it. The ‘#’ before a number indicates a parameterized tag.

Comments

Parameters

For example, in the Widg-O-matic Gantry_X_Axis parameter file Parameter #1 contains the shortcut
name [CLX]. This should match the shortcut name created in your RSLinx Enterprise communication
setup. Parameter #2 represents the tag name for the specific Faceplate AOI, within your Logix Designer
project, which the faceplate requests data from.
The Widg-O-matic Gantry_X_Axis parameter #2 is assigned to the faceplate AOI tag named
Gantry_X_Axis_FP found in the R02_Monitor routine of the P04_Gantry_X_Drive program.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 125


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

a. Double-click the parameter file to open it.

b. Enter your application controller’s shortcut name in all


parameters.

TIP Less editing is required when assigning HMI alarm tags if you name your controller shortcut [CLX]. Refer to Chapter 6 on
page 149 for configuring your controller shortcuts in RSLinx Enterprise communication setup.

c. Enter the associated faceplate AOI tag name of the device or


module for this faceplate parameter.
d. Close parameter file and acknowledge the Save Changes
dialog box.
9. Repeat step 8 for each of your device or module faceplate parameters.
For the Widg-O-Matic example, the parameters are edited as follows:

Widg-O-Matic Parameter File Parameter File Configuration


#1=::[CLX]
Gantry_X_Axis
#2=::[CLX]Gantry_X_Axis_FP
#1=::[CLX]
Gantry_Y_Axis
#2=::[CLX]Gantry_Y_Axis_FP
Conveyor_Drive #1=::[CLX]Conveyor_Drive_FP
#1=::[CLX]
Diverter_Drive
#2=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP
#1=::[CLX]Gantry_X_Axis_FP
#2=::[CLX]Gantry_Y_Axis_FP The Equipment Status faceplate requires that
parameters are set for all rows #1…9 even if they
#3=::[CLX]Conveyor_Drive_FP are not visible. Typically, the last visible row
#4=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP parameter is entered in the remaining
parameters. For example, Diverter_Drive_FP
EquipmentStatus #5=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP parameter entered for #4…9.
#6=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP
Refer to Configure Equipment Status Faceplate
#7=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP Display on page 138 for more information.
#8=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP
#9=::[CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP
#1=::[CLX]
Startup
#2=::[CLX]WidgOmatic
StateDiagram #1=::[CLX]WidgOmatic

126 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Import Alarm Setup File


Importing the Alarm Setup file is optional and required only if you are using the Alarm History faceplate in your
application.

IMPORTANT When importing the Alarm Setup file, your existing alarm configuration is lost. When prompted to backup your existing alarm
configuration, you can choose to save it as an XML file.

1. Right-click Alarm Setup within Alarms folder and


choose Import and Export.
The Alarm Import Export Wizard opens.

2. Select Import alarm configuration into application.


3. Click Next.

4. Select Yes, if you have an existing Alarm


Configuration.
5. Click Next.

6. In the backup file name field, type a backup file name.

7. Click to browse for the backup file destination.


8. Click Next.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 127


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

9. Navigate to the 03_Alarm_History folder


within the toolkit’s files folder.
Your personal computer’s harddrive path is
C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\
DMAT\B-Files\5-HMI\ME\HMI
Modules.
10. Select the Alarms.xml file.
11. Click Open.

The Alarm Import Export Wizard opens.


12. Click Finish.

13. Expand the Alarms folder and double-click Alarm Setup to verify import.

The triggers listed within the Triggers tab appear as shown.


14. Click OK to close the Alarm Setup dialog box.

128 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Delete Unused Alarm Triggers

IMPORTANT Deleting Unused Alarm Triggers is optional and applies only if you have imported the Alarm Setup file in the last section.

Follow these steps to delete any alarm triggers for hardware devices not used in your application. This could
improve performance of your PanelView Plus terminal communication.

1. Expand the Alarms folder.


2. Double-click Alarm Setup.

The Alarm Setup dialog box opens.


3. Click the Triggers tab.

4. Select any unused alarm trigger tags from the Select trigger organizer.
Unused trigger tags are any associated devices not configured in your Logix Designer project.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, these alarm triggers are used, so all other trigger tags can be
removed.
Alarm Triggers Used
PowerFlexAlarmTrigger
ModuleAlarmTrigger
CIPMotionTrigger
K300AlarmTrigger

5. Click Remove.
6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 for all unused trigger tags.
7. Click OK in the Alarm Setup dialog box to save edits.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 129


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Import and Edit Alarm Tags


Importing and editing Alarm Tags is optional and required only if you intend to use the Alarm History faceplate
in your application.

1. From the Tools menu, choose Tag Import and Export


Wizard.

The Tag Import and Export Wizard dialog box opens.


2. From the Operation pull-down menu, select Import
FactoryTalk View tag CSV files.
3. Click Next.

4. Click to browse for your existing FactoryTalk View.med


project file.
5. Click Next.

6. Click to browse for the 03_Alarm_History folder


within the toolkit’s files folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\5-HMI\ME\HMI Modules\03_Alarm_History.
The Select FactoryTalk View Export File dialog box opens.

130 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

7. Select AlarmHistory_Tags.
8. Click Open.

9. Verify selected file and Click Next.

10. Select Skip existing and Click Next.

11. Click Finish to execute import.


12. Close database confirmation dialog box.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 131


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

13. Expand the HMI tags folder in project Explorer™ and double-click Tags.

The HMI Tags editor appears in the workspace.


14. Verify a number of Alarm Tags have been added to the HMI tags listing.
15. Select each of the xxxAlarmHandshake,
xxxAlarmName, and xxxAlarmTrigger tags
associated with each of the Alarm Triggers
that were deleted in the previous section.
For example, the circled tags are three tags
you would delete if the E3AlarmTrigger had
been deleted previously.

16. Click to delete the tags.


17. Repeat step 15 through step 16 for all
unused Alarm tags associated with unused
Alarm Triggers.
18. Click Close to complete tag editing.

132 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Configure Goto Display Buttons on Startup Display


There are ten Goto Display button placeholders on the PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate display and six on the
PVP600_ Startup_Faceplate display. If more display buttons are required, simply duplicate one and configure it
for the additional display.

Follow these steps to configure Goto Display buttons for each of the device faceplates on your machine startup
display.

1. Expand the Displays folder and double-click PVPxxxx_Startup_Faceplate display.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the PVP1000_Startup_Faceplate display is opened.
In this example, device buttons 1…4 will be configured for the Gantry X, Gantry Y, Conveyor, and
Diverter device faceplates.
2. Double-click one of the device buttons.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 133


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

The Goto Display Button Properties dialog box opens.

3. Click to browse for the desired display.


For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the Device 1 button is selected and configured to
launch a faceplate for the Gantry X device.
The display Component Browser dialog box opens.

4. Select the desired display to launch when this device button is pressed.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the CIPMotion_Faceplate display is selected as it
supports the Gantry X device (Kinetix 6500 drive). Refer to the Determine the required faceplates for your
application based on the Determine the required faceplates for your application based on the table. table.
table on page 117 for faceplate supported devices.
5. Click OK to close the Component Browser dialog box.

134 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

6. Click to browse for the Parameter file.

The component Component Browser dialog box opens.


For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the Device 1 button is assigned to the
Gantry_X_Parameter that populates the Gantry_X tag data into the CIPMotion_Faceplate display when
launched.
7. Click OK to close the Component Browser dialog box.
The Goto Display Button Properties dialog box updates
with the Display and Parameter file settings you just
entered.
8. Set Display position settings as needed.
9. Click the Label tab to configure the desired button
caption text.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 135


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

10. The Label tab dialog box opens.


11. Type the desired text in Caption field.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example,
Gantry X is entered.
12. Click OK to save button properties.

The display updates with button changes. Device 1 is now Gantry X.

13. Repeat step 2 through step 12 for each Goto Display Button required for your application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the four Goto display buttons were configured.
Device Goto Display Button Display Setting Parameter Setting
Gantry X CIPMotion_Faceplate Gantry_X_Axis
Gantry Y CIPMotion_Faceplate Gantry_Y_Axis
Conveyor PowerFlex_753_755_Faceplate Converyor_Drive
Diverter K300_Faceplate Diverter_Drive

136 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

14. Select all unused Goto Display buttons and delete.

15. Select the State Diagram, Alarm History, and Equipment Status Goto display buttons and verify their
display settings or delete them if not required.
System Goto Display Button Default Display Default Parameter
State Diagram PVPxxx_StateDiagram_Faceplate StateDiagram_Parameter
Alarm History PVP1000_AlarmHistory_Faceplate None required
Equipment Status PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate EquipmentStatus_Parameter

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 137


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Configure Equipment Status Faceplate Display


The Equipment Status faceplate display provides a summary status of the devices in your system and another
launch site for your individual device faceplates.

IMPORTANT This section is optional and necessary only if you intend to use the Equipment Status faceplate.

The Equipment Status faceplate files let you quickly load and configure a summary display of preconfigured
status and diagnostic displays or faceplates for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition. The Equipment Status
faceplate works in conjunction with individual device faceplates and provides a single summary display of all of
the device faceplates that may be configured for an application. You can configure up to nine device faceplates to
run with the Equipment Status faceplate and you can launch each device faceplate directly from it.
Example of Equipment Status Display Configured with Four Device Faceplates

You can launch these


faceplates from the Goto
buttons.

CIP Motion Drive PowerFlex Drive

Kinetix 300 Drive

138 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Add the Equipment Status Faceplate Display


1. Right-click Displays within the Graphics folder and select Add Component Into Application.

2. Navigate to the 04_Equipment_Status folder within the toolkit’s files folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\


5-HMI\ME\HMI Modules\04_Equipment_Status.
3. Select the PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate.gfx file.
4. Click Open.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 139


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Add the ME_Equipment_Parameter File


1. Right-click Parameters within the Graphics
folder and select Add Component Into
Application.

2. Navigate to the 04_Equipment_Status


folder within the toolkit’s files folder.
Your personal computer’s harddrive path is
C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\
DMAT\B-Files\5-HMI\ME\HMI
Modules\04_Equipment_Status.
3. Select the EquipmentStatus_Parameter.par
file.
4. Click Open.

5. Verify the ME_Equipment_Parameter file


appears under Parameters.
6. Double-click ME_Equipment_Parameter to
open the parameter editor.

The EquipmentStatus_Parameter dialog box opens.

140 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

7. Assign device faceplate AOI tags to all nine parameters.

Each parameter #1…9 corresponds to the device AOI tag name of each Equipment Status faceplate Row
#1…9. You must assign the #1 parameter to a device faceplate AOI that includes the Inp_NumRowsVis
assignment that was configured in Chapter 4.
The remaining parameters #2…9 must be assigned to valid device faceplate AOI tag names for the
Equipment Status faceplate to operate without errors, even if corresponding Equipment Status faceplate
rows are not being used or assigned to non-preconfigured devices. It is recommended to fill in the unused
parameters with the last valid AOI tag name.
In the Widg-O-matic example, we are only using four rows, therefore, parameter #1…4 are assigned to the
corresponding device AOI tags that we display in rows #1…4. The remaining parameters, #5…9, are
assigned to the #4 row device AOI tag name, [CLX]Diverter_Drive_FP, as a place holder for those
faceplate objects in the non-visible rows #5…9.

8. Close the EquipmentStatus_Parameter dialog box and acknowledge the Save Changes dialog box.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 141


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Configure Goto Buttons on the Equipment Status Faceplate


1. Expand Displays within the Graphics folder and double-click PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate.

Goto Display Buttons

2. Right-click the display and choose Object Explorer.


The Object Explorer dialog box opens.
3. Expand Row_Group_1 and double-click
GotoDisplayButton_1.

The Goto Display Button Properties dialog box opens.

142 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

4. Click to browse the display faceplates.


The Component Browser opens.
5. Select the faceplate display to launch from the first
row Goto display button.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the
CIPMotion_Faceplate is selected.
6. Click OK to close the Component Browser dialog
box.

7. Click to browse the parameter


files.
The Component Browser opens.
8. Select the parameter associated with
the display to be launched from the
first row Goto display button.
For the Widg-O-matic application
example, the Gantry_X_Axis
parameter is selected.
9. Click OK to close the Component
Browser dialog box.
10. Click OK to save your edits to the
Goto Display Button Properties
dialog box.

11. Repeat steps step 3 through step 10 for each Goto Display Button used in the Equipment Status faceplate.
Unused buttons can remain on the display, but won’t be visible based on the Inp_NumRowsVis tag value
set in Chapter 4.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 143


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Configure Additional Device Value Columns


Not all device faceplates used with the Equipment Status faceplate are configured to display four Value fields. If
unused value fields are needed then additional logic will need to be added to the existing device AOI to move the
additional AOI tag values to the corresponding Sts_Valuexx tags.

In this example, pre-configured logic within a PowerFlex faceplate AOI is used to write values to Values 1 and 2.
Simply add additional MOV instructions to move other values to Values 3 and 4 if desired.

The same is true for the units displayed for each additional Value field desired. You can write Logic to move a
string value to the SetValueXUnits tag in the AOI, or you can set the default string for this tag by locating it in
the Local tags section of the AOI as shown below.

144 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Configure Equipment Status Faceplate for Energy Monitoring


The Equipment Status Faceplate for Energy display provides a summary of the energy status of the devices in
your system and also provides another launch site for your individual device faceplates.

This equipment status display works in the same manner as the standard Equipment Status faceplate described in
the previous section, however, it displays only energy related data.

IMPORTANT You must use the device module routines with energy support to support the equipment status faceplate for energy.

Add the Equipment Status Faceplate for Energy Display

1. Right-click Displays within the Graphics folder and select Add Component Into Application.
2. Navigate to the 04_Equipment_Status folder within the toolkit’s files folder.
Your personal computer’s harddrive path is C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\
5-HMI\ME\HMI Modules\04_Equipment_Status.
3. Select the PVP1000_EquipmentStatus_Faceplate_Energy.gfx
4. Click Open.

Add the ME_Equipment_Parameter File

1. Right-click Parameters within the Graphics folder and select Add Component Into Application.
2. Navigate to the 04_Equipment_Status folder within the toolkit’s files folder.
Your personal computer’s harddrive path is C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\
5-HMI\ME\HMI Modules\04_Equipment_Status.
3. Select the Energy_EquipmentStatus_Parameter.par file.
4. Click Open.
5. Verify the Energy_EquipmentStatus_Parameter file appears under Parameters.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 145


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

6. Double-click Energy_EquipmentStatus_Parameter to open the parameter editor.


The Energy_EquipmentStatus_Parameter dialog box opens.
7. Configure all nine parameters with your shortcut name and drive name.
The equipment status faceplate display for energy reads data from both the device faceplate AOI tag
(DriveName_FP) and the device energy object AOI tag (DriveName_BEO). The parameters combine
with _FP and _BEO within the faceplate as required.

Each parameter #1…9 corresponds to the device to be displayed in each Equipment Status faceplate Row
#1…9.
You must assign the #1 parameter to a device that includes the Inp_NumRowsVis assignment in its energy
object tag (DriveName_BEO.Inp_NumRowsVis).

The remaining parameters #2…9 must be assigned to valid device names for the Equipment Status
faceplate to operate without errors, even if corresponding Equipment Status faceplate rows are not being
used. It is recommended to fill in the unused parameters with the last valid AOI tag name.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


FactoryTalk View ME Configuration Chapter 5

Configure Goto Buttons on the Equipment Status Faceplate with Energy

To configure the goto buttons on the equipment status faceplate with energy, follow the same steps as shown on
Configure Goto Buttons on the Equipment Status Faceplate, beginning on page 142, for the standard equipment
status faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 147


Chapter 5 FactoryTalk View ME Configuration

Notes:

148 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Chapter 6

System Commissioning

In this chapter you download your Logix5000 and PanelView Plus applications, prepare and tune your drive
hardware, verify network communications, and verify general operator/program control.

Before You Begin


• Complete your logic configuration (refer to Chapter 4) or complete Appendix G
• Complete your FactoryTalk View Machine Edition configuration (refer to Chapter 5)

What You Need


• The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 19.0 or later, or the Logix Designer application, version 21.0 or later.
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.0 or later or the Logix Designer application, version 21.0 or later, to
configure Kinetix 350 servo drives, and when using ControlLogix 1756-L7xS controllers.
• FactoryTalk View Studio software, version 5.10 or later
• The user manual for your Drives and Motion hardware. Refer to Additional Resources on page 15 for
publication numbers.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 149


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Follow These Steps


Complete these steps to complete the commissioning process for your drives and motion application.

Start

Download Applications

page 150

Commissioning Devices

page 157

Commissioning Drives and


Motion Systems

page 179

Download Applications
This section provides general steps for downloading the Logix Designer project to the controller, and
downloading the FactoryTalk View project to the PanelView Plus terminal.

Download Logix Designer Project


Follow these steps to download your Logix Designer project file to the Logix5000 controller.

IMPORTANT The download steps assume controller power and communication wiring is connected, controller power is applied and RSLinx
communication driver is configured. Refer to Appendix D, on page 257, for more information on these topics.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file.

150 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

2. From the Communications menu, choose Who Active.

The Who Active dialog box opens.

3. Browse to and select your Logix5000 controller and click Set Project Path.
4. Verify the key switch on your controller module is in the REM (remote) position.
5. Click Download.
The Download dialog box opens.
6. Click Download.
7. From the Communications menu, choose Run mode to
switch the controller to Run mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 151


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Configure and Download FactoryTalk Project to PanelView Plus Terminal

IMPORTANT These download steps assume PanelView Plus power and communication wiring is connected, PanelView Plus terminal power is
applied.

Create a New RSLinx Enterprise Configuration

In this example, we use RSLinx Enterprise software to configure communication between your personal
computer and/or PanelView Plus terminal and your system’s Logix5000 controller.

Follow these steps to create a New RSLinx Enterprise configuration.

1. Open your HMI project file in FactoryTalk View Studio software.


2. Expand RSLinx Enterprise and double-click Communication Setup

The RSLinx Enterprise Configuration Wizard opens.

3. Select Create a new configuration.


4. Click Finish.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Configure Design (Local) Communication

The local tab in Communication Setup reflects the view of the topology from the RSLinx Enterprise server on
the development computer. In this example, the development computer is configured to communicate with an
L63 ControlLogix controller via Ethernet.

Follow these steps to setup the Design Time path.

1. Expand your system’s Ethernet


network.
2. Expand your system’s Ethernet
module.
3. Expand your controller bus or
backplane.
4. Select your system’s controller.

In this example, the controller is a ControlLogix 1769-L63 controller.


5. Click Add.
A new device shortcut appears.
6. Name the shortcut.

For this example, the shortcut is named CLX.


7. Select the new device shortcut and
the controller.
For this example, CLX shortcut
and 1756-L63 controller is
selected.
8. Click Apply.
A verification dialog box appears
showing that the shortcut was
assigned to the design path.
9. Close the verification dialog box.

The Apply button dims indicating the shortcut is attached to the path.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 153


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Configure Runtime (Target) Communication

The target tab displays the offline configuration from the perspective of the device that will be running the
application and comprises the topology that will be loaded into a PanelView Plus or PanelView Plus CE
terminal.

Follow these steps to copy the configuration from Design time to Runtime.

1. Click Copy from Design to Runtime.

This RSLinx Enterprise dialog box opens.


2. Click Yes.
3. Click Verify to make sure communication is
setup correctly.

The Shortcut Verifier dialog box opens.


4. Verify that the path to the Design device and
the Runtime device are assigned.
5. Click Close.
6. Click OK to save the configuration.

154 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Create Your FactoryTalk View Runtime Application File

Follow these steps to create a runtime file for downloading to a PanelView Plus terminal.

1. From the Application menu, choose Create


Runtime Application.

The Create Runtime Application dialog box


opens.
2. From the Save as type pull-down menu,
choose Runtime 5.10 Application (*.mer).
3. Enter a File Name for the application.
For the Widg-O-matic application example,
the file name is WidgOmatic_HMI.mer.
4. Click Save.
The Runtime application (*.mer) file is
created. This may take a few minutes.

Download Runtime File to PanelView Plus Terminal

1. Open FactoryTalk View Studio Machine


Edition software.
2. From the Tools menu, choose Transfer
Utility.

The Transfer Utility window opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 155


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

3. Click and browse to the runtime file.


The Select File to Download dialog box opens.

4. Select the runtime file you created earlier.


For the Widg-O-matic application example, WidgOmatic_HMI is selected.
5. Click Open.
6. Select the PanelView Plus terminal.

7. Click Download.
The file transfers to the PanelView Plus terminal.
8. Click OK when transfer is complete and prompted to do so.
9. Click Exit, to close the Transfer Utility window.
10. From the File menu, choose Exit to close FactoryTalk View software.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Commissioning Devices
This section provides general procedures for preparing and verifying the function of CIP Motion, sercos, and
PowerFlex drives, electronic overload relays, and ArmorStart distributed motor controllers.

IMPORTANT These commissioning procedures assume that drive power and communication wiring is connected and a personal computer with
the Logix Designer application and internet browser is available.

Commissioning CIP Motion Drives


These CIP Motion drive commissioning procedures apply to Kinetix 6500, Kinetix 5500, Kinetix 350,
PowerFlex 527, and PowerFlex 755 drives.

For more information on drive commissioning for these CIP Motion drives, refer to the appropriate user manual
listed in Additional Resources on page 15.

Set the Base Address


• For the Kinetix 6500 drives, set the base EtherNet/IP address on the IAM power module by using the node
address switches. In multi-axis configurations, these switches set the addresses for all of the drives on the
power rail.
• For Kinetix 5500 and PowerFlex 527 drives, set the EtherNet/IP address via the drive display soft menus
and navigation buttons. Set parameters via path Network>Static IP>IP address.

IMPORTANT You must cycle control power to make Kinetix 5500 and PowerFlex 527 network configuration changes persistent.

• For the Kinetix 350 drives, set the EtherNet/IP address via the drive display and keypad. Set parameters
IP_1, IP_2, IP_3, and IP_4.
• For the PowerFlex 755 drives, set the base address using the rotary switches on the main control board.

Apply Power to the Drive

For the Kinetix 6500 drives, apply control power to the IAM power module
Four-character
and observe the four-character display. If the four-character display is ON, Display
apply three-phase power.

Control Module Status Indicators

Status Indicator Status Kinetix 6500


E
UL
2
1

Status Indicators
RT
RT

OD
PO
PO

Module Steady green (normal operation)


Network Steady green (normal operation) Network

Flashing green
Bus DC Bus
(bus power is up, drive disabled, no major faults)
Safety Lock

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 157


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

For the Kinetix 5500 drives, apply power as required for your system configuration and observe the two status
indicators.
Module Status Indicator
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive
Condition Status
Steady Off No power applied to the drive. Module Status
Network Status
Steady Green Drive is operational. No faults or failures.
Flashing Green Standby (drive not configured).
Major recoverable fault. The drive detected a recoverable fault, for example, an
Flashing Red incorrect or inconsistent configuration.
Steady Red Major fault. The drive detected a non-recoverable fault.
Flashing Green/Red Self-test. The drive performs self-test during powerup.

Network Status Indicator


Condition Status
Steady Off No power applied to the drive or IP address is not configured.
Flashing Green Drive connection is not established, but has obtained an IP address.
Steady Green Drive connection is established. Normal operation.
Connection timeout. One or more of the connections, for which this drive is the target,
Flashing Red has timed out.
Steady Red Duplicate IP address. IP address specified is already in use.
Flashing Green/Red Self-test. The drive performs self-test during powerup.

For the Kinetix 350 drives, apply 120, 240, or 460V AC mains input power to the IPD connector. If logic power
is from (24V DC) back-up power, apply backup power to the BP connector first and then apply input power.

Drive Status Indicators

Status Indicator Status Status Kinetix 350


Flashing red/green or flashing green Self-test/no connections Status Indicators

Network Steady green Communication is ready


Steady or flashing red Communication error
Flashing red/green or flashing green Self-test/standby
Module Steady green Operational condition
Steady or flashing red Drive is faulted
Flashing red/green, flashing green, flashing amber Self-test/initialization
Axis Steady green Operational condition
Steady or flashing red Drive is faulted

158 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

For the PowerFlex 755 drives, apply control power first, if using an auxiliary power supply option, and then apply
three-phase drive power.

Drive Status Indicators

Status Indicator Status STS


PowerFlex 755
STS Flashing green (normal operation) ENET Status Indicators
ENET Solid green (no faults or failures) LINK
LINK Flashing green

For the PowerFlex 527 drives, apply power and wait for the startup sequence to complete. Verify that the MOD
and NET status indicators are steady green.

Drive Status Indicators

Status Indicator Status


PowerFlex 527
MOD Steady green (no faults or failures)
Status Indicators
NET Steady green (no faults or failures)
LINK A, LINK B Flashing green

Four-character Status Indicator Display

The Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755 drive displays should be scrolling STOPPED. The drives may take up to 60
seconds to reach the STOPPED (ready) state.
Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755 Status Display
Four-character Message Drive Status
BOOT, INIT, LOAD, DONE, TEST The drive is initializing. This sequence of four-character words continues to scroll up to three times.
Scrolling FW Version: x.xxx The drive is scrolling the current drive firmware revision.
Scrolling IP = 192.168.1.1 The drive is scrolling the drive IP address.
Scrolling CONFIGURING The drive is receiving configuration information from the controller.
Scrolling STANDBY The drive is trying to establish communication with the Logix5000 EtherNet/IP module.
Scrolling STOPPED The drive is fully configured, but the control loops are not enabled.
Scrolling error code message The drive is faulted. Refer to drive user manual.

The Kinetix 350 four-character display should be displaying -00-.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 159


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

LCD Display

For the Kinetix 5500 drives, the home screen displays PRECHARGE after PRECHARAGE
Kinetix 5500
completing the startup sequence. 192.168.1.1
Home Screen Display
DC BUS: 0.3V
Axis States on the Home Screen
Axis State Description
STANDBY The drive is waiting to receive configuration information from the controller.
CONNECTING The drive is trying to establish communication with the EtherNet/IP controller.
CONFIGURING The drive is receiving configuration information from the controller.
SYNCING The drive is waiting for a successful Group Sync service.
STOPPED The drive is fully configured, but the control loops are not enabled.
PRECHARGE The drive is ready for mains input power.
The drive is enabled and checking various conditions before entering the RUNNING or TESTING state. For
STARTING example, the drive checks the Brake Release delay time during the STARTING state.
• The drive is enabled, configured with an active control mode, and actively tracking a command.
RUNNING • The drive is configured for No Control and is fully operational.
TESTING The drive is actively executing a test procedure, for example, a hookup test.
STOPPING The drive is decelerating to a stop as the result of a disable.
ABORTING The drive is decelerating to a stop as the result of a fault or an abort request.
MAJOR FAULTED The drive is faulted due to an existing or past fault condition.
START INHIBITED The drive has an active condition that inhibits it from being enabled.
SHUTDOWN The drive has been shut down.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

The PowerFlex 527 drive initializes upon startup and status information scrolls
across the LCD display. After initialization, the Device/Axis state is shown on
the LCD display. In this example, the current state is STANDBY.
Device State Description
STANDBY The drive is waiting to receive configuration information from the controller.
CONNECTING The drive is trying to establish communication with the EtherNet/IP controller. PowerFlex 527
LCD Display
CONFIGURING The drive is receiving configuration information from the controller.
SYNCING The drive is waiting for a successful Group Sync service.
The drive is trying to establish communication with the EtherNet/IP controller, but the connection has
CONN_TIMEOUT timed out.
DUPLICATE_IP The drive has detected another device on the network with the same IP address.
FWUPDATE The drive is updating the firmware.

Axis States Description


INITIALIZING The drive is waiting to receive configuration information from the controller.
PRECHARGE The drive is ready for mains input power.
STOPPED The drive is fully configured, but the control loops are not enabled.
The drive is enabled and checking various conditions before entering the RUNNING or TESTING state. For
STARTING example, the drive checks the Brake Release delay time during the STARTING state.
• The drive is enabled, configured with an active control mode, and actively tracking a command.
RUNNING
• The drive is configured for No Control and is fully operational.
TESTING The drive is actively executing a test procedure, for example, a hookup test.
STOPPING The drive is decelerating to a stop as the result of a disable.
ABORTING The drive is decelerating to a stop as the result of a fault or an abort request.
MAJOR FAULTED The drive is faulted due to an existing or past fault condition.
START INHIBITED The drive has an active condition that inhibits it from being enabled.
SHUTDOWN The drive has been shut down.

Test and Tune the Axis

Use the Logix Designer application to access Axis Properties and run the Hookup test and Tune test.
• The Hookup test verifies encoder connections and direction.
• The tuning values for position units, velocity gains, acceleration, and deceleration rates are set in Axis
Properties based on the drive/motor combination and motor inertia only. The Autotuning procedure
calculates the gain values dynamically after determining inertia.

For more information on test and tune procedures, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in Additional
Resources on page 15.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 161


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Commissioning Sercos Drives


These sercos interface drive commissioning procedures were written specifically for Kinetix 6200 drives. The
Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 2000, Kinetix 7000, and Ultra3000 sercos drive configuration steps are similar. You can
also use the Kinetix 6000M integrated drive-motor (IDM) system when the IDM power interface module
(IPIM) is added to the Kinetix 6000 power rail.

For more information on drive commissioning for sercos drives, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in
Additional Resources on page 15.

Set the Base Address

Set the base sercos address on the IAM power module by using the node address switches. In multi-axis
configurations these switches set the addresses for all of the drives on the power rail.

Apply Power to the Drive

Apply control power to the IAM power module and observe the four-
Four-character
character display. If the four-character display is ON, apply three-phase Status Indicator
power.

Four-character Status Indicator Display


Four-character Status Indicator Status
The drive is looking for a closed sercos ring (phase 0). Wait for
Scrolling CP-0 CONFIGURING or take corrective action.
The drive is looking for active nodes (phase 1). Wait for CONFIGURING or
Scrolling CP-1 take corrective action.
The drive is configuring nodes for communication (phase 2). Wait for
Scrolling CP-2 CONFIGURING or take corrective action.
The drive is configuring device specific parameters (phase 3). When
Scrolling C O N F I G U R I N G
phase 4 is reached the drive displays the drive state.
Scrolling drive state (for example, The drive is configured and active (phase 4).
S H U T D O W N or S T O P P E D)
Scrolling error code message Drive is faulted.

Control Module Status Indicators


Status Indicator Status Kinetix 6200
Drive Steady green (normal operation) Status Indicators
M
1

E
RT

M
IV
DR

CO
PO

Comm Steady green (no faults or failures)


STATUS
Flashing green
Bus (bus power is up, drive disabled, no major faults)
DC Bus

Safety Lock

162 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Test and Tune the Axis

Use the Logix Designer application to access Axis Properties and run the Hookup test and Tune test.
• The Hookup test verifies encoder connections and direction.
• The tuning values for position units, velocity gains, acceleration, and deceleration rates are set in Axis
Properties based on the drive/motor combination and motor inertia only. The Autotuning procedure
calculates the gain values dynamically after determining inertia.

For more information on test and tune procedures for sercos drives, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in
Additional Resources on page 15.

Commissioning PowerFlex 7-class Drives


These commissioning procedures cover PowerFlex 70EC, PowerFlex 700, PowerFlex 753, and PowerFlex 755
drives.

For more information on drive commissioning, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in Additional
Resources on page 15.

Apply Power to the Drive

Apply control power first if using an auxiliary power supply option, and then apply three-phase drive power.

Status Indicators

Verify the drives are ready.


PowerFlex 755 Drive Status Indicators

Status Indicator Status STS PowerFlex 755


STS Flashing green Status Indicators
ENET
ENET Solid green
LINK
LINK Flashing green (indicating network activity)

PowerFlex 753 Drive Status Indicators

Status Indicator Status STS PowerFlex 753


STS Flashing green Status Indicators

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 163


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

PowerFlex 700 Drive Status Indicators

Status Indicator Status PWR


PowerFlex 700
Pwr Solid green STS Status Indicators
STS Flashing green
PORT
Port Flashing green (depending on communication module)
MOD

NET A

NET B

PowerFlex 70 EC Drive Status Indicators

Status Indicator Status PORT


PowerFlex 70EC
STS Flashing green MOD Status Indicators
Port Flashing green (depending on communication module) NET A

NET B

Start-up Routines STS

Start-up routines are available for the PowerFlex 7-class drives through
Assisted Start-Up on the HIM module or the Start-Up Wizard from one of the software tools. The start-up
routines do not apply for a PowerFlex 755 drive used in CIP Motion applications.
• The drive-mounted HIM module provides an assisted start-up and will step through configuration and
tuning.
• A software-based start-up wizard is available in DriveExplorer™ software, DriveTools™, or with the Custom
Download AOP for the PowerFlex 7-class drives. The start-up wizard steps through configuration and
tuning.

For more information on drive start-up routines for PowerFlex 7-class drives, refer to the appropriate user manual
listed in Additional Resources on page 15.

164 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Commissioning PowerFlex 5-class Drives


These commissioning procedures apply to PowerFlex 525 AC drives.

For more information on drive commissioning, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in Additional
Resources on page 15.

Apply Power to the Drive

Apply single or three-phase power to the respective PowerFlex 525 AC drive.

Status Indicators

Verify that the drives are ready.


PowerFlex 525 Status Indicators
Display Display State Description PowerFlex 525 Status Indicators
Off Adapter is not connected to the network.
Adapter is connected to the network and the drive is controlled through
Steady
ENET Ethernet.
Adapter is connected to the network, but the drive is not controlled through
Flashing Ethernet.
Off Adapter is not connected to the network.
LINK Steady Adapter is connected to the network, but not transmitting data.
Flashing Adapter is connected to the network and transmitting data.
FAULT Flashing red Indicates the drive is faulted.

Start-up Routines

The drive integral keypad and LCD display can assist in configuration and start-up by organizing the commonly
used parameters into the basic group. A software-based start-up wizard is available in Connected Components
Workbench™ software, or with the RSLogix 5000 / Studio 5000 Add-On Profile (AOP) for the PowerFlex 525
AC drive. The start-up wizard steps you through configuration and tuning.

For more information on the PowerFlex 525 drives, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in Additional
Resources on page 15.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 165


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Commissioning PowerFlex 4-class Drives


These commissioning procedures apply to PowerFlex 4, PowerFlex 40, PowerFlex 40P, and PowerFlex 400 drives.

For more information on drive commissioning, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in Additional
Resources on page 15.

Apply Power to the Drive

Apply control power first if using an auxiliary power supply option, and then apply three-phase drive power.

Status Indicators

Drives are ready when the Fault status indicator is off.


PowerFlex 4, 40, 40P, and 400 Drive Status Indicators

RUN VOLTS
FWD AMPS
REV HERTZ

PROGRAM FAULT
RUN
REV
FAULT

PowerFlex 4 or 40 Drives PowerFlex 40P Drives PowerFlex 400 Drives


Status Indicators Status Indicators Status Indicators

Start-up Routines

The drive integrated keypad can assist in configuration and start-up by organizing the commonly used
parameters into the basic group. An assisted start-up routine is available for the PowerFlex 4-class drives through
the Start-Up Wizard from one of the software tools. The software-based start-up wizard is available in
DriveExplorer software, DriveTools, or with the Custom Download AOP for the PowerFlex 4-class drives. The
start-up wizard steps through configuration and tuning.

For more information on drive start-up routines for PowerFlex 4-class drives, refer to the appropriate user manual
listed in Additional Resources on page 15.

166 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Commissioning Kinetix 300 Drives


These commissioning procedures apply specifically to the Kinetix 300 drives.

For more information on drive commissioning for Kinetix 300 drives, refer to the appropriate user manual listed
in Additional Resources on page 15.

Apply Power to the Drive

If using separate 24V DC logic power, apply 24V DC and observe the four-character display. If the four-character
display is ON, apply mains drive power. If not using separate 24V DC logic power, apply mains drive power.

Status Indicators

Verify the drives are ready.

Four-character Display Status Indicators

Status Kinetix 300 Status Indicators


Function Description
Indicator
A Enable Orange status indicator means that the drive is enabled (running).
B Regen Yellow status indicator means the drive is in Regeneration mode.
C Data entry Yellow status indicator flashes when changing.
D Drive fault Red status indicator illuminates upon a drive fault.
E Comm activity Green status indicator flashes to indicate communication activity.

Configure the Drive

Use MotionView OnBoard software to configure the drive/motor combination and the mode required for your
application.

Test and Tune the Drive

Use MotionView OnBoard software to run the Hookup test and Tune test.
• For testing the drive if using an incremental encoder, use MotionView OnBoard software to perform the
Check Phasing test. This test isn’t required if using an absolute encoder.
• For tuning the drive, use MotionView OnBoard software to perform Autotuning. The Auto Tune
procedure calculates the gain values dynamically after determining inertia. To perform Auto Tune, the
drive must be in Auto Tune mode.

For more information on test and tune procedures for Kinetix 300 drives, refer to the appropriate user manual
listed in Additional Resources on page 15.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 167


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Commissioning E3 Plus Overload Relays


These commissioning procedures apply specifically to the E3 Plus overload relays when communicating with the
193-DNENCAT module.

For more information on commissioning for E3 Plus overland relays, refer to the appropriate user manual listed
in Additional Resources on page 15.

Apply Power to the Relay

When power is applied to the DeviceNet connector, the trip relay closes if no fault exists, and the NETWORK
STATUS indicator flashes green. When the E3 Plus overload relay has been allocated by a Master, the
NETWORK STATUS indicator turns solid green. If a fault exists, the TRIP/WARN status indicator flashes.

Status Indicators

The E3 Plus overload relay provides the following status indicators.

E3 Plus Status Indicators

Status E3 Plus Status Indicators


Function Description
Indicator
Network DeviceNet network Refer to the E3 and E3 Plus Solid-state Overload Relay User Manual, E3 PLUS
Status status publication 193-UM002.
The Trip/Warn status indicator indicates device status by flashing a red trip NETWORK
STATUS
TRIP
WARN
code or an amber warning code. The flash pattern followed by a pause
Trip/Warn Device status OUT A OUT B
identifies the specific trip or warning. Refer to the E3 and E3 Plus Solid-state
Overload Relay User Manual, publication 193-UM002. IN 1 IN 3

OUT A The amber OUT A or OUT B status indicator illuminates when the output is IN 2 IN 4
Output command commanded on. However, an illuminated status indicator does not guarantee
OUT B status that the output is actually on.
IN 1
IN 2 Customer-supplied The amber IN1, IN2, IN3, or IN4 status indicator illuminates when a customer-
IN 3 contact status supplied contact is closed.

IN 4

DeviceNet Commissioning

1. Launch RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software.


2. Add the E3 Plus overload relay to your network configuration.
3. Open the Motor Overload folder and double-click the desired E3 Plus overload relay.
4. Assign the node number and desired name for the E3 Plus overload relay.
5. Click the Parameters tab.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

6. Set the following parameters:

IMPORTANT You must set these parameters or the AOI will not verify in your Logix Designer application.

Parameter Value
59, Output Assembly 105
60, Input Assembly 100
61, Assy Word 0 Param 21 (Param 21 supplies status of Inputs and Outputs)
62, Assy Word 1 Param 4 (Param 4 supplies Avg current)
63, Assy Word 2 Param 14 (Param 14 supplies Trip Status)
64, Assy Word 3 Param 15 (Param 15 supplies Warning Status)

7. Refer to the E3 and E3 Plus Solid-state Overload Relay User Manual, publication 193-UM002, to
determine which trips and warnings to enable and which corresponding parameter limits to configure.
8. Add the DeviceNet scanner to your network.
9. Assign the desired name and node number for the scanner.
10. Click the Scanlist tab.
11. Select your E3 Plus overload relay from the Available Devices dialog box and using the arrows, move the
E3 Plus overload relay to the Scanlist dialog box.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 169


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Commissioning E300 Electronic Overload Relays


These commissioning procedures apply specifically to the E300 electronic overload relays.

For more information on drive commissioning for E300 electronic overload relays, refer to the appropriate user
manual listed in Additional Resources on page 15.

Set the IP Address

1. Slide the relay cover down revealing the node address switches and network display.
The IP address is set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the factory default settings.
2. Set the network address by adjusting the three rotary switches.
Valid IP addresses are 001 through 254. When the switches are set to a valid number, the IP address will be
192.168.1.xxx (where xxx represents the last octet set on the switches).
The subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0.
3. Cycle power to the E300 relay by removing/replacing the 120V AC connector behind the EtherNet/IP
ports.

IMPORTANT You must cycle power when the IP address switches are used for the new setting to take effect.

Network Information:
• MAC ID
• Serieal number
• Firmware revision

Node Address Function


001…254 Set IP address to 192.168.1.xxx
255…887 Set IP address via DHCP or use static IP address
Node Address 889…999
888 Reset to factory defaults
000 Administrative mode

Apply power to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay

Refer to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay User Manual, publication 193-UM015, and apply power to your
E300 device.

170 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Interpret Status Indicators

Observe the status indicators to make sure the device is ready. The E300 relay provides status indicators and a
reset button on the front of the module.
E300 Front Panel Status Indicators

E300 Electronic Overload Relay Status Indicators


Status Indicator Display State Description
Blinking green Device ready, Operation mode.
Solid green Device active, current detected, Run mode.
POWER Solid red Device error.
Blinking red Communication error.
Blinking red/green Copy cat in progress.
Blinking red Trip event.
TRIP/WARN
Blinking yellow Warning event.
None Module is not receiving power.
Green, red, not illuminated sequence Normal power-up sequence.

MS Blinking green Module is not being scanned by the EtherNet/IP master.


(module status) Solid green Normal operating state. Module is allocated to a master.
Blinking red One or more EtherNet/IP connections timed out. Module is faulted.
Solid red Diagnostics test failed on power-up or reset.
None Module is not receiving power.
Green, red, not illuminated sequence Normal power-up sequence.
Blinking green Module is online, but with no connections established.
NS Solid green Normal operating state. Module is allocated to a master.
(network status)
Blinking red One or more EtherNet/IP connections timed out.
Diagnostics test failed on power-up or reset:
• Internal fault
Solid red • Duplicate IP address
• Communication error
None Module is not properly connected to the EtherNet/IP network.
LINK1, LINK2 Blinking green The EtherNet/IP network is properly connected.
Solid green EtherNet/IP network is communicating.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 171


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Configure the E300 Electronic Overload Relay

Follow these steps to configure your E300 device using the E300 Web server.

1. Turn all three of the node-address rotary switches to 0.


This sets the device in Administrative mode.
2. Cycle power on the device by removing/replacing the 120V AC connector behind the EtherNet/IP ports.
3. Enter the IP address of the E300 relay (192.168.1.10) in the browser's URL window.
4. Press Enter to access the web server.
The device is now in Administrative mode. You can modify parameter settings by using the E300 Web
server.

For more information on the E300 Web server and parameter setup, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in
Additional Resources on page 15.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Commissioning SMC-50 Soft Starter Modules


These commissioning procedures apply specifically to the SMC-50 soft starter modules.

For more information on drive commissioning for SMC-50 soft starters, refer to the appropriate user manual
listed in Additional Resources on page 15.

Apply Power to the Relay

Apply power to the SMC-50 soft starter module.

Status Indicators

The SMC-50 soft starter has one status indicator on the front of the module that displays fault and alarm codes
as described in the following table.

SMC-50 Module Status Indicator

Color Device Mode SMC-50 Module Status


Green Running Running without an alarm SMC-50 Soft
Green/amber Running Running with an alarm Starter Module

Green/flashing Ready Ready (no inhibit and no fault) without an alarm


Status Indicator
Amber/flashing Ready Ready (no inhibit and no fault) with tuning enabled on the next start
Amber Ready Ready with alarm (no tuning enabled)
Red/amber Inhibit Inhibited, cannot start due to a Stop command
Red Faulted A non-resettable fault has occurred
Red/flashing Faulted A resettable fault has occurred
Red/green Download Firmware is being downloaded

Startup Routines

Start-up routines are available for the SMC 50 soft starter through the Start-Up Configuration Tool on the
20-HIM-A6, 20-HIM-C6S module, or the Start-Up Wizard available in DriveExplorer software. The start-up
wizard steps through general configuration.

For more information on the SMC-50 soft-starter startup routine, refer to the SMC-50 Solid-state Smart Motor
Controller User Manual, publication 150-UM011.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 173


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Commissioning ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers


These commissioning procedures apply specifically to the Bulletin 290E, 291E and 294E ArmorStart LT
distributed motor control devices.

For more information on drive commissioning for ArmorStart LT distributed motor controllers, refer to the
appropriate user manual listed in Additional Resources on page 15.

Set the IP Address

1. Remove the protective caps from the IP address rotary switches on the front of the module.
The IP address is set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the factory default settings.
2. Set the network address by adjusting the three rotary switches.
Valid IP addresses are 001 through 254. When the switches are set to a valid number, the IP address will be
192.168.1.xxx (where xxx represents the last octet set on the switches).
The subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0.
3. Cycle power to the ArmorStart device.

IMPORTANT You must cycle power when the IP address switches are used for the new setting to take effect.

0 0 0
8 28 28 2

6 46 46 4
X100 X10 X1
In this example, the final octet
is set to 001 (DHCP).

Apply power to the ArmorStart LT

Refer to the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller User Manual, publication 290E-UM001, and apply
power to your ArmorStart LT device.

174 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Interpret Status Indicators

Observe the status indicators to make sure the device is ready. The ArmorStart LT motor controller provides
status indicators and a reset button on the front of the module.
ArmorStart LT Front Panel Status Indicators

ArmorStart LT Status Indicators


Indicator Description Color_1 Color_2
• Solid green indicates switched and unswitched • Solid yellow is indicates switched or unswitched
control power is within its specified limits and control power is outside its specified limits or
The bicolor (green/yellow) status indicator
PWR has the proper polarity. has incorrect polarity.
indicates the state of the control voltage. • Off indicates switched and/or unswitched power • Flashing yellow indicates line voltage is not
is not present. present (Bulletin 294 units only).
The bicolor (green/red) status indicator combines Blinking red indicates a prescribed fault pattern
RUN/FLT the functions of the Run and Fault status indicators. Solid green indicates a Run command is present. when a protection fault (trip) condition is present.
• Flashing green indicates an IP address is
• The bicolor (green/red) network status indicator configured, no integrated motion connections • Flashing red indicates the connection has timed
indicates the status of the Integrated Motion are established, and an Exclusive Owner
NS out.
over EtherNet/IP network connection. connection has not timed out.
(network status) • Steady red indicates a duplicate IP address is
• Flashing bicolor (red/green) status indicator • Steady green indicates at least one integrated detected.
indicates a self-test on power up. connection is established and an Exclusive
Owner connection has not timed out.
The bicolor (green/yellow) status indicators
LS1 and LS2 Solid green indicates a link is established at 100 Solid yellow indicates a link is established at 10
indicate the Link/Activity status of each EtherNetIP
(Link1 and Link2) Mbps. Mbps.
port.
• Flashing red indicates a resettable protection
• Flashing green indicates the device has not been fault exists or the node address switches have
MS The bicolor (green/red) status indicator indicates assigned an IP address. been changed without a power cycle and do not
(module status) the status of the module. • Steady green indicates the device is configured match the in-use configuration.
and operational. • Steady red indicates a non-resettable protection
fault exists.
I/O These six yellow status indicators (numbered Indicator is off when input is not valid or the output
(status indicators 0…5) indicate the status of the input/output Yellow indicates the input is valid or output is on. is not turn on.
1…5) connectors. One indicator for each I/O point.
The blue reset button causes a protection fault reset
Reset – –
to occur.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 175


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Commissioning ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controllers


These commissioning procedures apply specifically to the Bulletin 280E, 281E, and 284E ArmorStart
distributed motor control devices.

For more information on drive commissioning for ArmorStart distributed motor controller, refer to the
appropriate user manual listed in Additional Resources on page 15.

Set the IP Address

1. Remove the protective caps from the IP address rotary switches in the I/O section of the module.
The IP address is set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the factory default settings.
2. Set the network address by adjusting the three rotary switches.
Valid IP addresses are 001 through 254. When the switches are set to a valid number, the IP address will be
192.168.1.xxx (where xxx represents the last octet set on the switches).
The subnet mask is set to 255.255.255.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0.
3. Cycle power to the ArmorStart device.

IMPORTANT You must cycle power when the IP address switches are used for the new setting to take effect.

X100 X10 X1
0 0 0

2 8 2 8 2
8

6 4 6 4 6 4

In this example, the final octet


is set to 153 (DHCP).

176 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Apply power to the ArmorStart

Refer to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller User Manual, publication 280E-UM001, and apply
power to your ArmorStart device.

Interpret Status Indicators

Observe the control module status indicators to make sure the device is ready. The ArmorStart motor controller
provides four status indicators and a reset button on the front of the module.
ArmorStart Front Panel Status Indicators

Push RESET for local trip reset.

ArmorStart Status Indicators


Status Indicator Status Recommended Action
Solid green indicates switched control power is present and has Make sure 24V DC is present on A1 and A2. Check if the local disconnect is in the OFF
POWER the proper polarity. position.
Make sure 24V DC is present on A1 and A3. Check if the user is properly commanding to RUN
Solid green when a start command and control power is via Instance 162 or 166.
RUN present. See the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller User Manual,
publication 280E-UM001, for status indicator troubleshooting information.
This bicolor status indicator is used to indicate the status of the
NETWORK See the Network Status Indicator table on page 178, for more information.
internal network connection.
When the unit is faulted, the unit responds with a specific blink See the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller with EtherNet/IP User Manual,
FAULT pattern to identify the fault. publication 280E-UM001, for more information.

Observe the EtherNet/IP status indicators


to make sure the device is ready.

LINK 1 LINK 2
ACTIVITY/ ACTIVITY/
STATUS STATUS
MOD NET

EtherNet/IP Status Indicators

Refer to these tables on the next page for status indicator descriptions:
• Link 1 or Link 2 Port Activity/Status (LINK 1 and LINK 2)
• Module Status Indicator (MOD)
• Network Status Indicator (NET)

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 177


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Link 1 or Link 2 Port Activity/Status


Status Description Recommended Action
OFF No link established Verify network cabling, and correct, as needed.
Green Link established at 100 Mbps None
Flashing green Transmit or receive activity present at 100 Mbps None
Yellow Link established at 10 Mbps None
Flashing yellow Transmit or receive activity present at 10 Mbps None

Module Status Indicator


Status (1) Description Requirement
Steady OFF No power If no power is supplied to the device, the module status indicator shall be steady OFF.
Device
Steady Green If the device is operating correctly, the module status indicator shall be steady green.
operational
Flashing Green Standby If the device has not been configured, the module status indicator shall be flashing green.
• If the device has detected a recoverable minor fault, the module status indicator shall be flashing red.
Flashing Red Minor fault • An incorrect or inconsistent configuration would be considered a minor fault.
Non-volatile memory value out of range for a local parameter or a write failure detected. This fault is also reflected
0 EEPROM Fault by a solid red module status indicator.
The internal communication connection has timed out. This fault is also reflected by a flashing red module status
1 Internal Comm2 indicator.
Steady Red Major fault 2 Hardware Fault Internal diagnostics checks failed. This fault is also reflected by a solid red module status indicator.
• An illegal or unsupported control module product code or revision has been detected.
3 Control Module • No control module is detected on power up. This fault is also reflected by a solid red module status indicator
4…15 Reserved Reserved
Flashing Green/ Self-test While the device is performing its power up testing, the module status indicator shall be flashing green/red.
Red
(1) Refer to Parameter 63 “Base Trip” for the Base Module Trip Status.

Network Status Indicator


Status Description Requirement
Steady OFF No power, no IP address If the device does not have an IP address (or power is OFF), the network status indicator shall be steady OFF.
Flashing Green No connections If the device has no established connections, but has obtained an IP address, the network status indicator shall be flashing green.
Steady Green Connected If the device has at least one established connection (even to the message router), the network status indicator shall be steady green.
• If one or more of the connections (for which this device is the target) has timed out, the network status indicator shall be flashing red.
Flashing Red Connection timeout • This shall be left if only all timed out connections are reestablished or if the device is reset.
Steady Red Duplicate IP If the device has detected that the IP address is already in use, the network status indicator shall be steady red.
Flashing Red/ Self-test While the device is performing its power up testing, the network status indicator shall be flashing green/red.
Green

178 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

Commissioning Drives and Motion Systems


This section provides general procedures for verifying the function of a completed Drives and Motion
Accelerator Toolkit system.

IMPORTANT These commissioning procedures assume all applications are downloaded, all system devices are commissioned, a personal
computer with the Logix Designer application is available, and a PanelView Plus terminal is powered and connected to the
system’s EtherNet/IP network.

Verify Network Communication


Verify network communication between HMI terminal, Logix5000 controller, and devices.

HMI Terminal to Logix5000 Controller Communication

To determine if communication is lost between the HMI terminal and Logix5000 controller, look for:
• Error messages on the diagnostic display
• Wireframes on the display.

If there are communication problems with the controller, the diagnostic display lists messages (for example, CIP
Connection Error). If the HMI terminal can communicate with the controller, but it cannot read/write specific
tags, the diagnostic display lists similar messages (for example, Error Writing to xxxxx_Tag).

The HMI terminal displays wireframes and “?????” on objects with tags it cannot read from the controller.
HMI Terminal Display

A few of the most common problems are:


• Hardware problem such as a Ethernet cable disconnected.
• Communication path not properly configured in FactoryTalk View software, Communication Setup.
• Tag names in the parameter files not matching the tag names in the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 179


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Controller to Device Communication

Verify controller to device communication by observing the indicators on the controller’s communication
module and the devices in the controller’s I/O tree.

Observe the controller’s communication module. Refer to the user manual


for the specific module you are using. 1756-EN2TR
Ethernet Module
Ethernet Module Status Indicators
LNK1 LNK2 OK
Status Indicator Status
OK Solid green
LNK1 Flashing green (indicates network activity)
LNK2 Off (flashing green if in a Device Level Ring configuration)

Open your Logix Designer project, go online with the controller, and observe
the devices in the I/O tree. A device with a yellow exclamation mark (!)
indicates a fault. The fault could be a configuration fault, a device fault, or a
communication fault. View the quick pane in the Controller Organizer to
determine fault.

Clearing Faults
After all of the devices are connected and functioning on the network, clear faults to put the machine in a
STOPPED state.

HMI Clear Faults

When the controller powers-up and the program goes into Run mode, the machine is faulted and in the
ABORTED state. Refer to Appendix A, on page 225, for more information on the logic program modules.

You can attempt to clear the machine faults by pressing the Clear Faults push button on the HMI terminal. If
there are no faults, the machine state goes to STOPPED. Refer to Chapter 5, on page 101, for more information
on the HMI application programming.

180 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Commissioning Chapter 6

HMI Test Faults

Test the functionality of the state machine, device modules, and fault handling by simulating faults. By creating a
fault, the machine state should go to ABORTED and a fault should be logged on the HMI Alarm History
faceplate. Try creating a fault for each of the device modules in the system. You can create a fault by unplugging
an encoder cable or communication cable on a drive or servo. Verify that the machine goes to the ABORTED
state. After each fault, correct the simulated fault and verify that you can clear the faults. The machine goes to the
STOPPED state after the faults are cleared.

Refer to Chapter 7 on page 183 for more information on the faceplate fault diagnostic views.

Operator (manual) Control


Before attempting to run the machine, manually move or jog the drives if your configuration allows. With the
faults cleared and the machine state in STOPPED mode, put the machine in OPERATOR mode. You can select
each of the drives to manually move or jog. Test the Start/Stop mode, speed, and direction of each device.

Open one of the device faceplates. While in OPERATOR mode, manually jog
or move the drive.

Refer to Chapter 7 on page 183 for more information on how device control
buttons function.

Program (automatic) Control


With the faults cleared and the machine state in STOPPED mode, you can put the machine in PROGRAM
mode. By pressing the Start push button on the machine faceplate, the controller runs the machine according to
the application program.

IMPORTANT Care must be taken to provide safety and protect against machine damage by stepping through a planned start-up procedure.

Machine Status Indicators Machine Control Buttons

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 181


Chapter 6 System Commissioning

Notes:

182 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Chapter 7

System Application Guide

This chapter guides you through the pre-configured FactoryTalk View Machine Edition application faceplates
providing you with an understanding of the status, control, and diagnostic operation of the faceplate displays.

Before You Begin


• Complete your logic configuration (refer to Chapter 4).
• Complete your FactoryTalk View Machine Edition configuration (refer to Chapter 5).
• Complete your Logix5000 and PanelView Plus application downloads (refer to Chapter 6).

What You Need


• The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.
• Hardware installation and wiring complete with power applied.
• Logix Designer project file downloaded to the Logix5000 controller and controller set to run.
• FactoryTalk View ME runtime application file downloaded to the PanelView Plus terminal. Run
Application activated on terminal.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 183


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Follow These Steps


Complete these display overview steps to run the preconfigured application and gain an understanding of the
drives and motion system operation.

Start

Machine Startup Faceplate

page 185 SMC-50 Soft Starter Faceplates

Motion Drives Faceplates page 213

page 189 ArmorStart Distributed Motor


Controller Faceplates

PowerFlex Drives Faceplates page 216

page 197 Equipment Status Display


Overview

E3 Plus Overload Relay page 222


Faceplates
page 204 Alarm History Display Overview

E300 Overload Relay Faceplates page 223

page 208

184 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Machine Startup Faceplate


The Machine Startup faceplate display provides general machine status and control. It is also configured as the
main navigation display for access to the other devices, the Alarm History faceplate display, and the Equipment
Status faceplate display.

Machine Status
The Machine Status indicators (OK and Faulted) provide general machine status (refer to the figure below). The
specific indicator functions are included in the Machine Status Indicators table on page 186.

In this example, there are seven Goto display buttons configured. There is one Goto display button for each of
the four drives, the State Diagram, the Equipment Status display, and the Alarm History display. Pressing any of
the Goto display buttons launch the associated display.

IMPORTANT If the Machine Startup display is not visible or errors are reported on either the Logix5000 controller or PanelView Plus terminal,
refer to previous chapters to check system wiring and configuration settings.

Machine Status Indicators Machine Status Indicators


Faulted Status OK Status Machine Control Buttons

Abort Status Indicator Drive Goto Display


Buttons

Exit HMI Application


Button
System Goto Display Buttons

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 185


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Machine Status Indicators


Status Indicator Color/Value Description
OK Green No machine faults detected.
Faulted Red Machine fault detected.
Power Up
Module Not Ready
Module Fault
Abort Status Failed to RESET Displays additional diagnostic information for machine ABORT condition.
Failed to START
Failed to STOP
Failed to CLEAR
Green Machine is ready to run. By default, the machine will be in one of the following states: IDLE, STARTING or RUNNING
Ready
Grey Machine is not ready to run.
Green Safe speed condition is currently active in at least one device module.
Safe Speed
Grey Safe speed condition is not currently active.
ABORTING
ABORTED
CLEARING
RESETTING
State IDLE Displays the current machine state.
STARTING
RUNNING
STOPPING
STOPPED

186 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Machine Control
The Machine control buttons provide Operator Start, Stop, and Mode control.
Machine Control Buttons

Program/Operator Mode
Follow these steps to start and stop the motion system in Program control mode.

1. Press the Operator control mode button so that Program is displayed.


Program is now the active mode.
2. Press Start.
The required axes and drives are enabled and homed. The machine state goes to IDLE.
3. Press Start (again).
The required axes enable and begin operating according to the Logix Designer application. When the
system is running, Start appears dimmed. The machine state goes to RUNNING.
4. Press Stop.
The system stops.

IMPORTANT The machine must be in a stopped state to switch modes.

5. Press the Control mode button until Operator is displayed in the Control field.
In Operator control, you can use one of the faceplate displays to manually control one of the drives.

Machine Control Buttons

Control Button Button Function


Toggles the control mode between Program and Operator. Operator mode permits manual control of the drives from the faceplate. Program mode
Program/Operator operates the drive according to the Logix Designer application. The active control mode is displayed on the button.
If control mode is switched from Program to Operator while the machine is RUNNING, the machine is STOPPED.
When in Program control mode, pressing Start will RESET the machine and place it into IDLE. The Start button is disabled when in Operator control
Start mode. Pressing START when the machine is in IDLE places it into RUNNING.
When in Program control mode, pressing Stop brings the machine to a controlled stop. The machine must be stopped before you can switch to the
Stop other mode.
The Clear Faults button attempts to clear faults on all axes. The condition that caused the fault must be corrected, otherwise the machine will remain in
Clear Faults ABORTED.

IMPORTANT Start and Stop buttons on your PanelView Plus terminal do not replace a hardwired start/stop control circuit for safety purposes.
Your system should also include an emergency start/stop control circuit.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 187


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

State Diagram Faceplate Display


This display provides a graphical machine state status and is configured to fit within the middle section of the
Machine Startup display when launched from the State Diagram Goto display button.

White state indicator (oval) = Inactive machine state.

Green state indicator (oval) = Current machine state.

Gray state indicator (oval) = Previous machine state.

The State Diagram faceplate provides a quick reference for machine operators summarizing the relationship
between machine states. Refer to Appendix A on page 225 for more information on the individual states.

188 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Motion Drives Faceplates


The Motion drives faceplates are typically launched from the Machine Startup or Equipment Status faceplate’s
corresponding Goto display buttons.

TIP The Kinetix 300, sercos interface, and CIP Motion faceplates are similar in layout and the information they show, although
differences do exist. The examples shown in this section are for CIP Motion drives.

Home View
Close
Title Bar CIP Motion Drive Button

Faceplate
Toolbar

Status
Indicators

Faceplate Toolbar Buttons

Function Function
Icons Description Icons Description
Button Button
The Alarm button indicates a drive fault condition From the Axis Control display you can home,
and activates fault diagnostic views. A grey bell
Alarm Axis Control enable, disable, reset an axis fault, and manually
indicates normal status, with no faults. A yellow control the drive.
flashing bell indicates a fault condition.

The Configuration button lets you edit the faceplate The Help button provides information for the
Configuration Help
name or name of the device. existing view.

The Trending button shows you position, velocity,


Trending Close Click the Close button to close the faceplate.
and current/torque trends.

From the Axis Status display you can view general


Axis Status motion, axis, and drive status.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 189


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Axis Status Views


The Axis Status views let you display general motion, axis, and drive status.
• Green = ON state
• Gray = OFF state
CIP Motion Axis Status Views

CIP Motion Drive CIP Motion Drive

Press arrows to toggle


between display views.

Kinetix 300 Axis Status View

The Kinetix 300 faceplate contains only one axis status view
Kinetix 300 Drive and is slightly different from the CIP Motion and sercos
faceplates. The Kinetix 300 axis status view also displays the
four Input Assembly Links that are transmitted from the drive
to the controller.

190 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Axis Control Views

CIP Motion Drive CIP Motion Drive

Press Jog/Move to toggle


between display views.

General Status/Control Buttons

Conditions Required for


Each Manual Control Button
Button/Indicator Description
CIP Motion/ Kinetix 300 Drives
Sercos Drives
Toggles the control mode between Program and Operator mode.
Program/Operator Operator mode permits manual control of the drive from the faceplate. Program mode operates Machine cannot be in the STARTING or RUNNING state
the drive according to the Logix Designer application. The active control mode is displayed on
the button.
Toggles the drive between the enabled and disabled states. The active state of the drive is
Disabled/Enabled Operator Mode
displayed on the button.
Clears any active drives faults. The button appears dimmed when no active faults are present in • Operator Mode
CLR Faults the drive. • Active Drive Fault
CIP Motion and sercos drives: The reset sequence is initiated. By default, the reset sequence
typically executes a motion axis home (MAH) instruction. • Operator Mode
Home Operator Mode • Drive Enabled
Kinetix 300 drives: A start homing command is sent to the drive.
Toggles manual control between Move and Jog.
Move mode, by default, performs an incremental position move based on the Move Position • Operator Mode
Move/Jog and Speed setpoints. • Drive Enabled
Jog mode, by default, jogs the drive in the desired direction (forward/reverse) based on the Jog
Speed.

Move Status/Control Buttons


Conditions Required for
Each Manual Control Button
Button/Indicator Description
CIP Motion/ Kinetix 300 Drives
Sercos Drives
• Operator Mode
Dual purpose control. Displays the actual position feedback of the drive. Also launches the
Move Dist • Drive Enabled
numeric keypad to enter the desired Move Distance. • Move Selected
• Operator Mode
Dual purpose control. Displays the actual speed feedback of the drive. Also launches the
Move Spd • Drive Enabled
numeric keypad to enter the desired Move Speed. • Move Selected
• Operator Mode
Start Move Initiates or starts the manual move. • Drive Enabled
• Move Selected

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 191


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Jog Status/Control Buttons


Conditions Required for
Each Manual Control Button
Button/Indicator Description
CIP Motion/ Kinetix 300 Drives (1)
Sercos Drives
• Operator Mode
• Operator Mode
Position Displays the actual position of the drive. • Drive Enabled • Jog Selected
• Jog Selected
• Operator Mode
Dual purpose control. Displays the actual speed feedback of the drive. Also launches the • Operator Mode
Jog Spd • Drive Enabled
numeric keypad to enter the desired Jog Speed. • Jog Selected
• Jog Selected
• Operator Mode
Jogs the drive in the forward direction while the button is held. The drive stops immediately • Operator Mode
Jog Fwd • Drive Enabled
once the button is released. • Jog Selected
• Jog Selected
• Operator Mode
Jogs the drive in the reverse direction while the button is held. The drive stops immediately • Operator Mode
Jog Rev • Drive Enabled
once the button is released. • Jog Selected
• Jog Selected
(1) For the Kinetix 300 drive in Jog control mode, Drive Enable is not applicable.

Jog Speed, Move Distance, and Speed Controls

Jog Spd, Move Dist, and Move Spd are both indicators and keypad input buttons. For example, the Jog Spd
indicator displays the actual speed feedback of the drive, not the desired jog speed. However, by clicking the
indicator you launch the keypad input object where you can enter the desired jog speed.
Dual Purpose Controls

Enter desired jog speed.

Actual speed feedback from drive.

192 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Fault Indication View


The Alarm button indicates a Close
drive fault condition and activates CIP Motion Drive Button

the fault diagnostic views. Flashing Fault


Indicator

Alarm Indicator

Current Fault
Indicators General Status
Indicators

Fault Indication View

Toolbar Button Color Indicator Description Action


Grey Normal state None
Alarm
Flashing yellow Fault Follow fault action screen

To access the detailed fault information and action displays, press the alarm button on the toolbar.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 193


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Fault Diagnostic Views


Last Fault View

CIP Motion Drive


Help Button

Press Help to go to Fault Description


views.

The Last Fault view is displayed when you press


Alarm. The specific error being reported by the
module is indicated.

Fault Description View Fault Actions View

CIP Motion Drive CIP Motion Drive

Press arrows to toggle


between display views.

This diagnostic information is triggered by the reported module error code. The input
and output error code information provided is in accordance with the fault
descriptions and actions found in the drive specific user manual.

194 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Configuration View

The configuration button takes you to a display to edit the


faceplate name or device descriptions.

You can enter display names and units as required for your
application. Some of the labels are used on the Equipment Status
faceplate.

Pressing any of the name or device descriptions launches an ASCII


keypad for text entry. Pressing Enter on the keypad completes
editing.

Trend Views
Follow these steps to discover the trend views.

1. Press the trend toolbar button to access the trend CIP Motion Drive
faceplate views.
The trend views let you monitor the position, velocity and
current values.

2. Press the Next Pen button to shift between the


position, velocity, and current/torque trends. CIP Motion Drive
The Y-axis scale is automatically adjusted based on
the trend pen you select.
In this example, the Position trend is selected.
The green box around position, velocity, and
current/torque indicates the selected pen.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 195


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

In this example, the Current trend is selected and the Y-axis


scale is adjusted accordingly. CIP Motion Drive

3. Press the trend configuration toolbar button to set the CIP Motion Drive
minimum and maximum values of the trend Y-axis scale.

The trend scale configuration screen opens.


4. Press the value fields to modify.
A popup keyboard opens for value entry. CIP Motion Drive
5. Press the Enter key on the keyboard, when entry
is complete.

Value
Fields

196 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

PowerFlex Drives Faceplates


The PowerFlex drives faceplates are typically launched from the corresponding Machine Startup or Equipment
Status faceplate’s Goto display button.

Home View
Close
Title Bar PowerFlex Drive Button

Faceplate
Toolbar

Status
Indicators
Command
Buttons

Numeric
Display

Faceplate Status/Control Buttons


Button Icons Description
The Alarm button indicates a drive fault condition and activates fault
Alarm (1) diagnostic views. A grey bell indicates normal status, with no faults. A red
flashing bell indicates a fault condition.

The Configuration button lets you edit the PowerFlex faceplate name or
Configuration name of the device.

Trending The Trending button shows you voltage, current, and speed trends.

Help The Help button provides information for the existing view.

Close Click the Close button to close the faceplate.

Toggles the control mode between Program and Operator. Operator mode
permits manual control of the drives from the faceplate. Program mode
operates the drive according to the Logix Designer application. The active
Program/Operator control mode is displayed on the button.
If control mode is switched from Program to Operator while the machine
is RUNNING, the machine is STOPPED.

Numeric Display Click the Numeric Display button to access numeric entry keypad.

(1) There is no Alarm indication on the PowerFlex 525 drive faceplate because the PowerFlex 525 drive does not support alarms.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 197


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Control View
The overview faceplate places the logic program in control by default. For an operator to take control, press the
Program button. The text on the button changes to Operator and the drive command buttons (Start and Stop,
for example) are enabled.
Close
PowerFlex Drive Button

Faceplate
Toolbar

Status
Indicators
Command
Buttons

Numeric
Display

Forward, Reverse, Jog, Start, and Stop command buttons let the operator perform the normal drive functions as
the names suggest. You can also enter a speed reference by pressing the numeric display.

Fault Indication View


The Alarm button indicates a drive fault condition and activates the fault diagnostic views.
Close
PowerFlex Drive Button

Flashing Fault
Help
Indicator
Button

Current Fault
Indicator (red)

Command
Buttons

Fault Indication View


Toolbar Button Color Indicator Description Action
Grey Normal state None
Alarm (1)
Flashing red Fault Follow fault action screen
(1) There is no Alarm indication on the PowerFlex 525 drive faceplate because the PowerFlex 525 drive does not support alarms.

To access the detailed fault information and action displays, press the alarm button on the toolbar.

198 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Fault Diagnostic Views


Last Fault View

PowerFlex Drive
Help Button

Press Help to go to Fault Description


views.

The Last Fault view is displayed when you press


Alarm. The specific error being reported by the
module is indicated.

Fault Description View Fault Actions View

PowerFlex Drive PowerFlex Drive

This diagnostic information is triggered by the


reported module error code. The input and output
error code information provided is in accordance
with the fault descriptions and actions found in the
drive specific user manual.

Press arrows to toggle between


display views.

Configuration Views
You can use the Configuration button to edit the faceplate name or device descriptions.

1. Press the Configuration button on the toolbar.


PowerFlex Drive
The Configuration button becomes highlighted.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 199


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

2. Press the title bar, drive name, or value fields that you
need to modify.

These HMI faceplates apply to the PowerFlex 525 drives and are used for assigning the device name and
units to the faceplate and the speed units and pens associated with them.

PowerFlex 525 Drive PowerFlex 525 Drive

A popup keyboard opens.


3. Type the desired text or values.
4. Press the Enter key.

Enter Key

200 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Trend Views

1. Press the trend toolbar button to access the trending PowerFlex Drive
faceplate view.
The trend views let you monitor the voltage, current, and
speed values.

2. Press the Next Pen button to shift between the voltage,


current, and speed trends. PowerFlex Drive
The Y axis scale is automatically adjusted based on the
trend pen you select.
In this example, the Speed trend is selected.
The green box around Voltage, Current, and Speed
indicates the selected pen.

This HMI faceplate applies to the PowerFlex 525


drives. PowerFlex 525 Drive

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 201


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

In this example, the Voltage trend is selected and the


Y-axis scale is adjusted accordingly. PowerFlex Drive

3. Press the trend configuration toolbar button to set the PowerFlex Drive
minimum and maximum values of the trend scale.

This HMI faceplate applies to the PowerFlex 525 drives.


PowerFlex 525 Drive

The trend scale configuration screen opens.

202 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

4. Press the value fields to modify.


PowerFlex Drive

Value
Fields

This HMI faceplate applies to the PowerFlex 525


drives. PowerFlex 525 Drive

Value
Fields

A popup keyboard opens for value entry.


5. Press the Enter key on the keyboard, when entry is
complete.

Energy Status Views


If the PowerFlex Drive faceplate with the Energy Monitoring option is used, there will be also be an Energy tab
available on the toolbar.

Press the energy toolbar button to access the energy status faceplate view.

PowerFlex Drive PowerFlex Drive

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 203


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Online Help Views


Press the Help button on any view to access the online help information.

PowerFlex Drive PowerFlex Drive

Online Help
Example

E3 Plus Overload Relay Faceplates


The E3 Plus overload relay faceplate is typically launched from the corresponding Machine Startup or
Equipment Status faceplate's Goto display button.

Home/Control View
Close
Title Bar E3 Plus Overload Relay Button

Faceplate
Toolbar

Command
Buttons
Status
Indicators

Numeric
Display

204 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Faceplate Status/Control Buttons


Button Icons Description
The Alarm button indicates a fault condition and activates fault diagnostic
Alarm views. A grey bell indicates normal status, with no faults. A red flashing
bell indicates a fault condition.

The Configuration button lets you edit the E3 Plus overload relay faceplate
Configuration name or name of the device.

Help The Help button provides information for the current view.

Close Click the Close button to close the faceplate.

Grey = OK, normal, off


Red = Tripped
Status Indicators Yellow = Warning/Outputs commanded closed/user device inputs closed
Green = Active load present
Toggles the control mode between Program and Operator. Operator mode
permits manual control of the relay from the faceplate. Program mode
Program/Operator operates the relay according to the Logix Designer application. The active
control mode is displayed on the button.
The command buttons are enabled when in Operator mode. Trip Reset,
Command Buttons Output A, and Output B let the operator perform the E3 Plus overload
relay functions as the names suggest.

Fault Indication View


The Alarm button indicates a drive fault condition and activates the fault diagnostic views.

E3 Plus Overload Relay


Flashing Fault
Indicator
Current Fault
Indicator (red)

Fault Indication View


Toolbar Button Color Indicator Description Action
Grey Normal state None
Alarm Flashing yellow Warning None
Flashing red Fault Follow fault action screen

To access the detailed fault information and action displays, press the alarm button on the toolbar.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 205


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Fault Diagnostic Views


Last Fault View

E3 Plus Overload Relay


Help Button

Press Help to go to Fault


Description views.

The Last Fault view is displayed when you press


Alarm. The specific error being reported by the
module is indicated.

Fault Description View Fault Action View

E3 Plus Overload Relay E3 Plus Overload Relay


This diagnostic information is triggered by the
reported module error code. The input and output
error code information provided is in accordance
with the fault descriptions and actions found in the
E3 Plus overload relay user manual.

Press arrows to toggle between


display views.

206 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Configuration View
You can use the Configuration button to edit the faceplate name or device descriptions.

1. Press on the faceplate toolbar to launch the Configuration view.


The only parameter that is configurable from the E3 Plus faceplate is the faceplate/device name.

E3 Plus Overload Relay

Enter Key

2. Click the string entry box to launch the keyboard popup.


3. Type the desired text.
4. Press Enter.

Online Help Views

Press on the faceplate toolbar of any view to access the online help information.

E3 Plus Overload Relay

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 207


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Energy Status Views


If the E3 Plus overload relay faceplate with the Energy Monitoring option is used, the Energy tab also appears on
the faceplate toolbar.

Press on the Energy faceplate toolbar to access the energy status faceplate view.

E3 Plus Overload Relay E3 Plus Overload Relay

E300 Overload Relay Faceplates


The E300 overload relay faceplate is typically launched from the corresponding Machine Startup or Equipment
Status faceplate's Goto display button.

Home/Control View
Title Bar Close
Button
Faceplate
Toolbar

Command
Buttons
Status
Indicators

Program/Operator
Current Display Button

208 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Faceplate Status/Control Buttons


Button Icons Description

The Alarm button indicates a fault condition and activates fault diagnostic views. A grey
Alarm bell indicates normal status, with no faults. A red flashing bell indicates a fault condition.

The Configuration button lets you edit the E3 Plus overload relay faceplate name or name
Configuration of the device.

Trending The Trending button displays a trend of the current and % TCU.

Energy The Energy button displays a list of energy related data values.

Help The Help button provides information for the current view.

Close Click the Close button to close the faceplate.

Grey = Inactive/De-energized/OFF
Green = ON
Status Indicators (1) Yellow = Energized/Warning
Red = Alarm/Fault

Toggles the control mode between Program and Operator. Operator mode permits
manual control of the relay from the faceplate. Program mode operates the drive
Program/Operator according to the Logix Designer application. The active control mode is displayed on the
button.

Command buttons are available for performing a trip reset and energizing outputs from
the faceplate. The command buttons are enabled when the E300 relay is in Remote mode
Command Buttons (1) and Operator mode is selected by the operator. If the E300 relay is in Remote mode, but
Program mode is selected, the buttons are disabled. If the E300 relay is not in Remote
mode, the buttons are not visible and the faceplate indicates that the device is currently
under Local Keypad Control.

The Expansion Modules button is available when there are expansion modules configured.
Clicking this button displays the status of inputs and outputs on the expansion modules.
Expansion Modules The number of expansion modules shown updates dynamically, based on the module
properties defined in the controller.
(1) The number of inputs and outputs displayed, changes dynamically based on the module properties defined in the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 209


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Fault Indication View


The Alarm button indicates a drive fault condition and activates the fault diagnostic views.

Flashing Fault
Indicator
Current Fault
Indicator (red) Alarm Fault Indications
Color Indicator Description Action
Grey Normal state None
Flashing yellow Warning Follow fault action screen
Flashing red Fault Follow fault action screen

To access the detailed fault information and action displays, press the alarm button on the toolbar.

Fault Diagnostic Views


Last Fault View

Help Button

Press Help to go to Fault


Description views.

The Last Fault view is displayed when you press


Alarm. The specific error being reported by the
module is indicated.

Fault Description View Fault Action View

This diagnostic information is triggered by the


reported module error code. The input and output
error code information provided is in accordance
with the fault descriptions and actions found in the
E300 overload relay user manual.

Press arrows to toggle between


display views.

210 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Configuration View
You can use the Configuration button to edit the faceplate name or device descriptions.

1. Press on the faceplate toolbar to launch the Configuration view.

Enter Key

2. Click the string entry box to launch the keyboard popup.


3. Type the desired text.
4. Press Enter.

Online Help Views

Press on the faceplate toolbar of any view to access the online help information.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 211


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Trend View
The Trend view displays a trend of either the average current or the % Thermal Capacity Utilized (TCU).

1. Press on the toolbar to access the trending faceplate view.

2. Press the Next Pen button to toggle between trend views.

3. Press on the configuration toolbar to set the minimum and maximum display range.

Energy Status View


If the E300 overload relay faceplate with the Energy Monitoring option is used, the Energy tab also appears on
the faceplate toolbar.

Press on the Energy faceplate toolbar to access the energy status faceplate view.

The energy data displayed is dependent on the module definition configured in the controller. If you do not have
a voltage-sensing module configured, only the current is displayed on the energy tab.

212 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

SMC-50 Soft Starter Faceplates


The SMC-50 soft starter faceplate is typically launched from the corresponding Machine Startup or Equipment
Status faceplate's Goto display button.

Home/Control View
Close
Title Bar SMC-50 Soft Starter Button

Faceplate
Toolbar

Status
Indicators

Command
Buttons
Numeric
Displays

Faceplate Status/Control Buttons


Button Icons Description
The Alarm button indicates a fault condition and activates fault diagnostic
Alarm views. A grey bell indicates normal status, with no faults. A red flashing
bell indicates a fault condition.

The Configuration button lets you edit the SMC-50 communication fault
Configuration timer, slow speed percent, and faceplate/device name.

Trend The Trending button shows you voltage, current, and MTU trends.

Help The Help button provides information for the current view.

Close Click the Close button to close the faceplate.

Grey = Inactive/De-energized/Off
Status Indicators Green = Active/Energized/On
Red = Alarm/Fault
Toggles the control mode between Program and Operator. Operator mode
permits manual control of the SMC-50 soft starter from the faceplate.
Program/Operator Program mode operates the drive according to the Logix Designer
application. The active control mode is displayed on the button.

The command buttons are enabled when in Operator mode. Start, Stop,
Command Buttons Stop Maneuver, and Slow Speed buttons let you perform the SMC-50 soft
starter functions as the names suggest.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 213


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Fault Indication View


The Alarm button indicates a drive fault condition and activates the fault diagnostic views.

SMC-50 Soft Starter


Flashing Fault
Indicator

Current Fault
Indicator (red) Alarm Fault Indications
Color Indicator Description Action
Grey Normal state None
Flashing red Fault Follow fault action screen

To access the detailed fault information and action displays, press the alarm button on the toolbar.

Fault Diagnostic Views


Last Fault View

SMC-50 Soft Starter


Help Button

Press Help to go to Fault


Description views.

The Last Fault view is displayed when you press


Alarm. The specific error being reported by the
module is indicated.

Fault Description View Fault Action View

SMC-50 Soft Starter SMC-50 Soft Starter


This diagnostic information is triggered by the
reported module error code. The input and output
error code information provided is in accordance
with the fault descriptions and actions found in the
SMC-50 soft starter user manual.

Press arrows to toggle between


display views.

214 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Configuration View
You can use the Configuration button to edit the faceplate name or device descriptions.

1. Press on the faceplate toolbar to launch the Configuration view.

SMC-50 Soft Starter

Enter Key

2. Click the string entry box to launch the keyboard popup.


3. Type the desired text.
4. Press Enter.

Online Help Views

Press on the faceplate toolbar of any view to access the online help information.

SMC-50 Soft Starter

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 215


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Energy Status Views


If the SMC-50 soft starter faceplate with the Energy Monitoring option is used, the Energy tab also appears on
the faceplate toolbar.

Press on the Energy faceplate toolbar to access the energy status faceplate view.

SMC-50 Soft Starter SMC-50 Soft Starter

ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Faceplates


The ArmorStart faceplates are typically launched from the corresponding Machine Startup or Equipment Status
faceplate's Goto display button.

IMPORTANT This faceplate is only for the ArmorStart Bulletin 294E. Each ArmorStart device has its own faceplate with similar functions.

Home View
Close
Title Bar Button

Faceplate Help
Toolbar Button

Status Command
Indicators Buttons

6 - Input/Output

216 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Faceplate Status/Control Buttons


Button Icons Description

The Alarm button indicates a fault condition and activates fault diagnostic views. A grey bell indicates normal status, with no faults. A red
Alarm flashing bell indicates a fault condition.

Configuration The Configuration button lets you edit the ArmorStart faceplate name or name of the device.

Help The Help button provides information for the current view.

Trending The Trending button shows you voltage, current, and speed trends.

Close Click the Close button to close the faceplate.

Grey = OK, normal, off


Red = Tripped
Status Indicators Yellow = Warning/Outputs commanded closed/user device inputs closed
Green = Active load present

Toggles the control mode between Program and Operator. Operator mode permits manual control of the relay from the faceplate. Program
Program/Operator mode operates the relay according to the Logix Designer application. The active control mode is displayed on the button.

Control View
The overview faceplate places the logic program in control by default. For an operator to take control, press the
Program button. The text on the button changes to Operator and the drive command buttons (Run and Jog, for
example) are enabled.

IMPORTANT This faceplate is only for the ArmorStart Bulletin 294E. Each ArmorStart device has its own faceplate with similar functions.

Close
Title Bar Button

Faceplate Help
Toolbar Button

Status Command
Indicators Buttons

Numeric
Display

RunFwd, RunRev, JogFwd, JogRev, and Stop command buttons let the operator perform the normal functions as
the names suggest. You can also enter a speed reference by pressing the numeric display.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 217


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Fault Indication View


The Alarm button indicates an ArmorStart fault condition and activates the fault diagnostic views.

Title Bar

Flashing Fault
Indicator
Current Fault (red) or
Warning Indicators
Alarm Fault Indications
Color Indicator Description Action
Grey Normal state None
Flashing red Fault Follow fault action screen

To access the detailed fault information and action displays, press the alarm button on the toolbar.

IMPORTANT These faceplates are only for the ArmorStart Bulletin 294E. Each ArmorStart device has its own faceplate with similar functions.

Fault Diagnostic Views


Last Fault View

Help Button

The Last Fault view is displayed when you press


Alarm. The specific error being reported by the
module is indicated.

Clear Fault Button

Fault Action View Fault Description View

This diagnostic information is triggered by the


reported module error code. The input and output
error code information provided is in accordance
with the fault descriptions and actions found in the
drive specific user manual.

Press arrows to toggle between


display views.

218 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Configuration Views
You can use the Configuration button to edit the faceplate name or device descriptions.

IMPORTANT This faceplate is only for the ArmorStart Bulletin 294E. Each ArmorStart device has its own faceplate with similar functions.

1. Press on the faceplate toolbar to launch the Configuration view.

2. Press the title bar, drive name, or value fields that you need to modify.

Value Fields

3. Type the desired text and press the Enter key.


This faceplate is for assigning the device name and units of the faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 219


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Trend Views

IMPORTANT This faceplate is only for the ArmorStart Bulletin 294E. Each ArmorStart device has its own faceplate with similar functions.

1. Press on the toolbar to access the trending faceplate view.


The trend views let you monitor the voltage, current, and speed values.

2. Press on the toolbar to set the minimum and maximum values of the trend scale.

220 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

3. Press the value fields to modify.


A popup keyboard opens for value
entry.
4. Press the value fields to modify.
A popup keyboard opens for value
entry.
5. Press the Enter key on the
keyboard, when entry is complete.

Value Fields

Online Help Views

IMPORTANT This faceplate is only for the ArmorStart Bulletin 294E. Each ArmorStart device has its own faceplate with similar functions.

Press on the faceplate toolbar of any view to access the online help information.

Online Help Example

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 221


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Equipment Status Display Overview


The Equipment Status faceplate files let you quickly load and configure a summary display of preconfigured
status and diagnostic displays or faceplates for FactoryTalk View Machine Edition. The Equipment Status
faceplate works in conjunction with individual device faceplates and provides a single summary display of all of
the faceplates that may be configured for an application. You can configure up to nine device faceplates to run
with the Equipment Status faceplate and you can launch each device faceplate directly from it.

In this example, the drives from the Widg-O-matic example were added to the Equipment Status display. Click
the device buttons to open the associated device faceplates.
Equipment Status Example - Widg-O-matic Drives Added

CIP Motion Drive PowerFlex Drive

Kinetix 300 Drive

222 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


System Application Guide Chapter 7

Equipment Status Display for Energy Overview


The Equipment Status Display for Energy provides a summary of the energy status for all of the devices
configured for an application. It also provides a central place for launching the device faceplates. You can
configure up to nine devices to run with the Equipment Status Display for Energy faceplate.

Alarm History Display Overview


The Alarm History display provides time and date stamped machine and device faults, and alarms when
launched from the Alarm History Goto display button on the Machine Startup faceplate display.
Alarm History Faceplate Display Example

In this example, a number of faults are displayed from a CIP Motion drive named Gantry X Axis.

Refer to FactoryTalk View Machine Edition User Manual Volume 1, publication VIEWME-UM004 for Alarm
History alarm button operation and configuration.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 223


Chapter 7 System Application Guide

Notes:

224 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Appendix A

Logic Program Overview

The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017, was developed around a
modular concept. Modularity lets you decide which components to incorporate into your machine, providing
greater flexibility and a custom fit. The preconfigured logic is specifically designed around this modular concept
and consists of three main logic modules.
Logic Module Overview
Logic Module Type Function
The machine module contains the high level control for the entire machine. The machine module was built around a simple state machine that
you can customize to fit most applications. The machine module broadcasts out commands and receives feedback information from each of the
Machine application and device modules. Based on the feedback information, the machine will react accordingly.
In addition, the machine module provides a high level interface with the HMI, accepting commands like Start, Stop, and Clear Faults. It provides
status info to the HMI terminal like current state of the machine (for example, RUNNING versus STOPPED).
The application modules contain all of the application specific code. This is where a majority of the customizing is expected to occur and is
Application essentially a programming space where you spend a significant portion of your efforts to develop proprietary logic specific to your application.
Device modules contain all of the logic to control the essential functions required by the device. For example, an Integrated Motion servo drive like
the Kinetix 6500 requires logic (MSO and MSF instructions) to enable and/or disable the servo drive. This logic reduces the programming effort
Device required by most applications providing more time for the proprietary logic needed for the application.
Typically, the device module consists of a physical drive, but could also consist of a virtual or feedback-only axis. Device modules can also consist of
multiple devices (for example, a drive) and perhaps a feedback device (for example, a sensor).

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 225


Appendix A Logic Program Overview

Machine/Application/Device Module Relationship


The machine module monitors the current state of the overall machine and based on the state and/or requests
from the HMI terminal, broadcasts out commands to both the application and device modules. The individual
modules perform a predefined task based on the command. Some of the commands may be ignored depending
on the module type.
HMI Application

Controller Logic
PanelView Plus Terminal

Machine Status Machine Faceplate


Machine
Module
Device Faceplate

Machine Application
Commands Status

Application Operator
Module Commands

Device Device
Commands Status

Device
Module

226 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Program Overview Appendix A

Each of the modules are defined as


individual programs in the Logix
Machine Module
Designer application.

Application Module

Monitor and Control Routines

Device Modules

Each program contains all of the necessary logic to interact with the other configured modules. This interface
between each of the modules is accomplished via the Monitor and Control routines located in each of the
programs. The machine commands and corresponding module status is routed through the Monitor and
Control routines. This lets the modules operate independently in a modular structure.

Module Routine Overview


Each module is broken down into routines that contain logic for a specific function. Each module contains a
monitor and control routine that provides a common interface between the machine and the application / device
modules. Each of the routines main functions are listed below:
Module Routine Listing Examples

These routines apply to


PowerFlex 525 drives.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 227


Appendix A Logic Program Overview

Module Routine Overview


Logic Module Type Routine Function
R00_Main Dispatch routine, calls all of the other routines in the program.
R01_PowerUp Initializes parameters following power up or controller first scan.
• Summarizes the status from all of the dependent modules (for example, application and device
modules).
Machine R02_Monitor • Detects Abort and/or Stop conditions.
• Provides machine status information to HMI terminal.
• Provides main interface with HMI terminal requests (for example, Start/Stop/Clear Faults
R03_Control pushbuttons).
• Contains the state machine logic.
R00_Main Dispatch routine, calls all of the other routines in the program.
R01_PowerUp Initializes parameters following power up or controller first scan.
• Summarizes the status for the application module (for example, OK, Ready, Running, Stopped).
R02_Monitor
• Detects module faults (for example, Failed to RESET, Failed to RUN).
Application Receives machine commands and initiates the corresponding sequences (for example, RESET, RUN and
R03_Control STOP sequences).
R04_Reset Contains the RESET sequence logic, used to prepare the application to run.
• Typical location for the application specific logic.
R10_ApplicationCode
• Contains the RUN and STOP sequences.
R00_Main Dispatch routine, calls all of the other routines in the program.
R01_PowerUP Initializes parameters following power up or controller first scan.
• Summarizes the status for the device module (for example, OK, Ready, Reset).
R02_Monitor • Detects module faults (for example, Failed to RESET, Failed to CLEAR, Module Not Ready).
• Contains the faceplate add-on instruction (AOI) for the HMI terminal faceplate.
Receives machine commands and initiates the corresponding sequences (for example, RESET and ABORT
R03_Control
PowerFlex sequences)
SMC-50 • Contains place holder for application specific reset logic if required.
E3 Plus • Contains the ABORT sequence which makes sure that the drives contained within the module are
R04_Reset_Abort
E300 stopped and disabled. The ABORT sequence also makes sure that other devices are placed into a
ArmorStart desired state.
R05_Energy • Gets the energy data from the device using explicit messaging.
(applies only if the device module
with energy monitoring is used) • Monitors the communication status and sets alarm and status bits related to energy.

R07_Drive_Interface • Contains the drive status, command, and communication logic for PowerFlex 525 drives.
(applies to PowerFlex 525 drives only) • Contains place holder for drive specific datalink logic if required.
R11_OperatorMode Contains the Operator or Manual mode logic for the PowerFlex 525 drives. This logic is initiated via
(applies to PowerFlex 525 drives only) requests made from drive faceplate located on the HMI terminal.

228 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Program Overview Appendix A

Module Routine Overview (continued)


Logic Module Type Routine Function
R00_Main Dispatch routine, calls all of the other routines in the program.
R01_PowerUP Initializes parameters following power up or controller first scan.
• Summarizes the status for the device module (for example, OK, Ready, Reset).
R02_Monitor • Detects module faults (for example, Failed to RESET, Failed to CLEAR, Module Not Ready).
• Contains the faceplate add-on instruction (AOI) for the HMI terminal faceplate.
Receives machine commands and initiates the corresponding sequences (for example, RESET and ABORT
R03_Control sequences)
Kinetix 300
• Contains the RESET sequence logic, used to prepare the application to run.
R04_Reset_Abort • Contains the ABORT sequence which makes sure that the drives contained within the module are
stopped and disabled. The ABORT sequence also makes sure that other devices are placed into a
desired state.
R06_Messaging Contains all of the explicit messaging logic required for the Kinetix 300 drive.
R10_EnableDisable Contains the enable, disable, clear faults logic for the Kinetix 300 drive.
Contains the Operator or manual mode logic for the Kinetix 300 drive. This logic is initiated via requests
R11_OperatorMode made from drive faceplate located on the HMI terminal.
R00_Main Dispatch routine, calls all of the other routines in the program.
R01_PowerUP Initializes parameters following power up or controller first scan.
• Summarizes the status for the device module (for example, OK, Ready, Reset).
R02_Monitor • Detects module faults (for example, Failed to RESET, Failed to CLEAR, Module Not Ready).
• Contains the faceplate add-on instruction (AOI) for the HMI terminal faceplate.

Sercos Receives machine commands and initiates the corresponding sequences (for example, RESET and ABORT
R03_Control
or sequences)
CIP Motion • Contains the RESET sequence logic, used to prepare the application to run.
R04_Reset_Abort • Contains the ABORT sequence which ensures that the drives contained within the module are stopped
and disabled. The ABORT sequence can also make sure that other devices are placed into a desired
state.
R10_EnableDisable Contains the enable, disable, clear faults logic for the drives.
Contains the Operator or Manual mode logic for the drive. This logic is initiated via requests made from
R11_OperatorMode drive faceplate located on the HMI terminal.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 229


Appendix A Logic Program Overview

Machine Module
The machine module contains the high level control for the entire machine. The machine module was built
around a simple state machine that you can customize to fit most applications. The machine module broadcasts
out commands and receives feedback information from each of the application and device modules. Based on the
feedback information, the machine will react accordingly.

In addition, the machine module provides a high level interface with the HMI, accepting commands like Start,
Stop, and Clear Faults. It provides status info to the HMI terminal like current state of the machine (for example,
RUNNING versus STOPPED).

Machine States
By default, the machine program module operates based on this overall state diagram.
Machine State Diagram

The machine can go from any state in the shaded box to STOPPING.

IDLE START
RESETTING STARTING RUNNING
(enabled)

STOP
ABORT

The machine can go from any state


STOPPING
in the solid box to ABORTING.
ABORTING
RESET

STOPPED CLEAR
CLEARING ABORTED
(disabled)

Transitional State Machine


Permanent State
Command

The machine module uses the Transitional States to move between Permanent States. Typically, the machine
only remains on a Transitional State for brief period of time. If the machine module detects an error during a
Transitional State or if the application or device modules fail to transition within an allotted time (10 seconds by
default), the machine module issues an ABORT command. The fail safe transition timer makes sure the overall
machine does not become stuck in a Transitional State. It also helps to provide diagnostic information to
determine which module is not transitioning properly.

230 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Program Overview Appendix A

You can fully customize the state machine, letting you change the relationship between states and the state
names, and add or remove states if needed. Refer to Appendix B on page 241 for information on how to
customize the state machine.
Default Machine States
Machine State State Type Description
Broadcasts the ABORT command until confirmation that all of the application and device modules are aborted. The
ABORTING state is triggered based on feedback from the modules.
Default ABORT conditions that place the machine in the ABORTTING state include:
• Power-up detected (for example, controller first scan)
ABORTING Transitional • Modules not ready while the machine is in STARTING and/or RUNNING states
• Modules detected a fault condition
• Modules failed to RESET
• Modules failed to START
• Modules failed to STOP
• Modules failed to CLEAR
All application and device modules are aborted (for example, stopped and disabled). Typically, this state indicates a
ABORTED Permanent fault condition.
Broadcasts the CLEAR command until confirmation that all of the application and device modules are ok (for example,
all active drive and/or modules have been cleared) within the allotted time. Otherwise, an ABORT condition is
CLEARING Transitional generated.
Once all of the modules are ok, the machine is placed into the STOPPED state.
Broadcasts the RESET command until confirmation that all of the application and device modules are reset within the
RESETTING Transitional allotted time. Otherwise, an ABORT condition is generated.
All application and device modules are reset or ready to run (for example, enabled or homed). Typically, this state that
IDLE Permanent the machine is ready to run and awaits a START command.
Broadcasts the RESET command until confirmation that all of the application modules are running within the allotted
STARTING Transitional time. Otherwise, an ABORT condition is generated.
RUNNING Permanent All application modules are running.
Broadcasts the STOP command until confirmation that all of the application modules are stopped within the allotted
STOPPING Transitional time. Otherwise, an ABORT condition is generated.
STOPPED Permanent All application modules are stopped and all modules (application and/or device) are ready.

Default Machine Commands


Machine Command Application Module Response Device Module Response
Halts the device module RESET sequence (if active) and initiates the
device module ABORT sequence. The ABORT sequence makes sure the
Halts the application RUN sequence (if active) and initiates the STOP drives contained within the module are stopped and disabled.
ABORT sequence. The STOP sequence attempts to stop and disable all active drives.
The ABORT sequence can also be used to make sure other devices are
placed into a desired state.
Attempts to clear any active faults that exist in either the module and/or
CLEAR Attempts to clear any active faults that exist in the modules. drive.
Initiates the application RESET sequence, which prepares the application Initiates the device module RESET sequence, which prepares the device
RESET and/or devices to run. Use this for the coordinated reset of multiple module to run.
modules.
Initiates the application RUN sequence. Customize the RUN sequence to fit
START Ignored (1)
the needs of your application.
Halts the application RUN sequence (if active) and initiates the STOP
STOP sequence. The STOP sequence attempts to stop and disable all active drives. Halts the device module RESET sequence.
(1) By default, these commands are ignored by the module. However, you can change the relationship of each module to best fit the needs of the application.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 231


Appendix A Logic Program Overview

Machine Control Module Tags


The machine control data type, UDT_MachCtrl, comprises the overall machine control and status, including
the state machine. The user-defined data type consists of these components.

Machine Mode

Machine Commands

Current Machine State

Previous Machine State


Machine State Display

Machine Status

Machine Tags
Tag Group Function
Additional modes can be added to the machine. By default, the modes included are:
Machine mode • OPERATOR or manual mode
• PROGRAM or auto mode
Broadcast machine commands that direct all of the dependent modules (for example, application
Machine commands and device modules).
Current machine state Indicates the current state of the overall machine. Only one state can set at even given time.
Indicates the previous machine state. Used primarily by the application and device modules to
Previous machine state determine Transitional State faults.
Machine state display String tag that can be used to indicate the current machine state.
Machine status Indicates miscellaneous machine status information.

232 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Program Overview Appendix A

Device and Application Status Rung Tags and Logic


The device and application status rungs provide feedback information to the machine module and consists of
these components.
Device Module Status

Application Module Status

The status bits are set in the Monitor routine of the corresponding modules. These status bits are vital to the
machine module, as they are used to determine the overall status of the machine. They help the machine
transition between states or detect a fault and respond accordingly. All of the module status information is
summarized in the Monitor routine of the machine module.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 233


Appendix A Logic Program Overview

For these Widg-O-matic application examples, the rungs are found in the R02_Monitor routine of the
P01_WidgOmatic machine program.
Widg-O-matic Device and Application Status Rung Example

MODULE STATUS
13 NOP

ALL MODULES ABORTED

Module Aborted Module Aborted Module Aborted Module Aborted


Gantry_X_Drive.Aborted Gantry_Y_Drive.Aborted Conveyor_Drive.Aborted Diverter_Drive.Aborted
14

All_Modules_Aborted

ALL MODULES READY

Module Ready for Module Ready for Module Ready for Module Ready for
Use Use Use Use
Gantry_X_Drive.Ready Gantry_Y_Drive.Ready Conveyor_Drive.Ready Diverter_Drive.Ready
15

All_Modules_Ready

ALL MODULES RESET

Module Reset Module Reset Module Reset Module Reset


Gantry_X_Drive.Reset Gantry_Y_Drive.Reset Conveyor_Drive.Reset Diverter_Drive.Reset
16

All_Modules_Reset

ALL MODULES OK
Module OK (NOT Module OK (NOT Module OK (NOT Module OK (NOT
Faulted) Faulted) Faulted) Faulted)
Gantry_X_Drive.OK Gantry_Y_Drive.OK Conveyor_Drive.OK Diverter_Drive.OK All_Modules_OK
17

ANY MODULE SAFE LIMITED SPEED REQUEST


Module
Safe Limited Speed
Request
Gantry_X_Drive.SLSReq Any_Module_SLSReq
18
Module
Safe Limited Speed
Request
Gantry_Y_Drive.SLSReq

Module
Safe Limited Speed
Request
Conveyor_Drive.SLSReq

Module
Safe Limited Speed
Request
Diverter_Drive.SLSReq

234 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Program Overview Appendix A

Widg-O-matic Device and Application Status Rung Example (continued)

APPLICATION STATUS

19 NOP

ALL APPLICATIONS READY


Application Ready Application Ready
for Use for Use
Assembly.Ready Packaging.Ready All_Applications_Ready
20

ALL APPLICATIONS INITIALIZED


Application Application
Initialized Initialized
Assembly.Reset Packaging.Reset All_Applications_Reset
21

ALL APPLICATIONS RUNNING


Application Running Application Running
Assembly.Running Packaging.Running All_Applications_Running
22

ALL APPLICATIONS STOPPED


Application Stopped Application Stopped
Assembly.Stopped Packaging.Stopped All_Applications_Stopped
23

ALL APPLICATIONS OK
Application OK (NOT Application OK (NOT
Faulted) Faulted)
Assembly.OK Packaging.OK All_Applications_OK
24

(End)

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 235


Appendix A Logic Program Overview

Application Modules
The application modules contain all of the application specific code. This is where a majority of the customizing
is expected to occur and is essentially a programming space where you spend a significant portion of your efforts
to develop proprietary logic specific to your application.

In this example, application code is shown for the Widg-O-matic machine’s assembly application.
============================================================================================
============================================

SERCOS / CIP MOTION


SIMPLE INCREMENTAL MOVE

The following application example demonstrates how to control a SERCOS / CIP MOTION drive using sequencers &
Motion Instructions.
While the Machine is STARTING / RUNNING, the drive will be operated as follows:

1) Lower Y-Axis - Incremental Distance -2.0 revs


2) DWELL - Time 1 sec
3) Raise Y-Axis - Incremental Distance 2.0 revs
4) Extend X-Axis - Incremental Distance 3.0 revs
5) Lower Y-Axis - Incremental Distance -2.0 revs
5) DWELL - Time 1 sec
6) Raise Y-Axis - Incremental Distance 2.0 revs
7) Retract X-Axis- Incremental Distance -3.0 revs
8) Repeat

The Run Sequence is continuously repeated until the Stop Sequence is initiated by a Machine ABORT or STOP
command.

============================================================================================

NOP

============================================================================================
============================================

RUN SEQUENCE

============================================================================================
============================================

NOP

INCREMENTAL MOVE

Lower Y-Axis
Incremental Distance -2.0 revs
Motion Axis Move
EQU MAM
Equal Motion Axis Move EN
Source A RunSEQ[0] Axis Gantry_Y_Axis ...
0 Motion Control Gantry_Y_Axis_Ctrl.MI.MAM[1] DN
Source B 1 Move Type 1
ER
Position -2
IP
Speed Gantry_Y_Axis_Ctrl.Data.MoveSpd[1]
1.0 PC
Speed Units Units per sec
Accel Rate Gantry_Y_Axis_Ctrl.Data.MoveAccel[0]
50.0
Accel Units % of Maximum
Decel Rate Gantry_Y_Axis_Ctrl.Data.MoveDecel[0]
50 0

236 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Program Overview Appendix A

Device Modules
Device modules contain all of the logic to control the essential functions required by the device. For example, an
Integrated Motion servo drive like the Kinetix 6500 requires logic (MSO and MSF instructions) to enable and/
or disable the servo drive. This logic reduces the programming effort required by most applications providing
more time for the proprietary logic needed for the application.

Typically, the device module consists of a physical drive, but could also consist of a virtual or feedback-only axis.
Device modules can also consist of multiple devices (for example, a drive) and perhaps a feedback device (for
example, a sensor).

Device Module Tags


The application and individual device modules interact with each other via device specific control tags that
include both command and status information. The control tags consist of these data types.
Device Tags
Device Classifications Covered Products Data Type
• PowerFlex 4-class drives, for example, 4, 40, 40P
• PowerFlex 7-class drives, for example, 70EC, 700VC Product specific add-on defined (AOI) data type: PFlex_XXX_AOI
PowerFlex drives • PowerFlex 750-Series drives for example, 753, 755 Where XXX refers to the specific PowerFlex drive
• PowerFlex 520-Series drives for example, 525
Kinetix 300 drives Kinetix 300 User-defined type: UDT_K300_Ctrl
• Kinetix 2000
• Kinetix 6000
Sercos physical axis • Kinetix 6000M User-defined type: UDT_ServoCtrl
• Kinetix 6200
• Kinetix 7000
Sercos feedback-only axis Applicable sercos drives User-defined type: UDT_ServoCtrl
• Kinetix 6500
CIP Motion physical axis User-defined type: UDT_ServoCtrl
• PowerFlex 755
CIP Motion frequency control PowerFlex 755, PowerFlex 527, and Kinetix 5500 User-defined type: UDT_FreqCtrl
CIP Motion feedback-only axis Applicable CIP motion drives User-defined type: UDT_ServoCtrl
Virtual axis N/A User-defined type: UDT_ServoCtrl
Add-on defined (AOI) data type:
SMC-50 solid-state soft starters SMC-50 solid-state soft starters
SMC_50_AOI
E3 Plus overload relay with Add-on defined (AOI) data type:
communications auxiliary E3 Plus overload relay with 193-DNENCAT module
(193-DNENCAT) device E3_CommsAux_rev6_AOI

• PowerFlex 7-class drives, for example, 70EC, 700VC


PowerFlex drives, SMC-50 soft • PowerFlex 750-Series drives, for example, 753, 755 In addition to the device AOI tags, a user defined data type is used to
starters, and E3 Plus overload relays • SMC-50 solid-state soft starters provide energy monitoring: UDT_BEO
with energy monitoring • E3 Plus overload relay with 193-DNENCAT module
ArmorStart product specific add-on defined (AOI) data type:
AS_2xxE_AOI
ArmorStart distributed motor • ArmorStart LT 290E, 291E, and 294E ArmorStart ST product specific add-on defined (AOI) data type: (1)
controllers • ArmorStart 280E, 281E, and 284E AS_2xxE_AOI_wIPS or
AS_2xxE_AOI_woIPS
Where xx refers to the specific ArmorStart motor control
(1) With or without internal power supply (IPS).

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 237


Appendix A Logic Program Overview

All of the data types listed above can be modified to fit specific needs of your application. However,
modifications to the data types could have an impact on the device module and/or other preprogrammed logic,
especially during import of additional device modules.

For example, the UDT_ServoCtrl data type that is used by the integrated motion drives (CIP Motion and sercos
interface based drives) consists of these tags.
CIP Motion UDT_ServoCtrl Tag Listing

Commands

Status

Motion Instructions

Miscellaneous Data Placeholders

UDT_ServoCtrl Tags
Tag Group Function
The command tags initiate preprogrammed logic in the device module. The command tags can be set (latch - OTL) in either the device and/or
application module, and the device module will perform the requested action. The device module also clears the command bit (unlatch – OTU).
Commands
For example, if the Enable bit is latched, the corresponding device module executes a Motion Servo On (MSO) instruction and unlatches the
Enable bit.
The Status tags are updated by the device module and contain commonly used information that can be referenced by both the device and
application modules.
Status
For example, if the ON status bit is set, the application or device module knows that the drive is fully enabled.
Placeholders for Motion Instructions. This provides one central group of Motion Instructions that can be used by both the application and device
Motion instructions
module.
Placeholders for commonly used data for the application and device modules. The data placeholder tags are set by default in the PowerUP
Miscellaneous data placeholders
routine located in the device module.

238 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Program Overview Appendix A

The user-defined type for the Kinetix 300 drives and the add-on defined data type for the PowerFlex drives serve
similar function as the UDT_ServoCtrl data type, however their layouts differ. Refer to the specific data types
for more information.

Device Module Control Logic Example


In this example, the R03_Control routine for a CIP motion device module initiates and/or clears the Reset and
Abort sequences. The routine also attempts to clear any active faults.
MODULE COMMANDS
3 NOP

RESET
Machine Commands Servo Ready for Use
Mach_Ctrl.Cmd.RESET Servo_Ctrl.Status.Ready
<WidgOmatic.Cmd.RESET> ONS[0].5 <Gantry_X_Axis_Ctrl.Status.Ready> MOV
4 ONS Move
Source 1

Dest ResetSEQ[0]
0

STOP
Machine Commands
Mach_Ctrl.Cmd.STOP
<WidgOmatic.Cmd.STOP> FLL
5 Fill File
Source 0
Dest ResetSEQ[0]
Length 4
CLEAR

Servo OK (NOT
Machine Commands Faulted) Clear Faults
Mach_Ctrl.Cmd.CLEAR Servo_Ctrl.Status.OK Servo_Ctrl.Cmd.ClearFaults
<WidgOmatic.Cmd.CLEAR> <Gantry_X_Axis_Ctrl.Status.OK> <Gantry_X_Axis_Ctrl.Cmd.ClearFaults>
6 / L
Module OK (NOT
Faulted)
Module.OK
<Gantry_X_Drive.OK> FLL
Fill File
Source 0
Dest AbortSEQ[0]
Length 4
ABORT
Module OK (NOT
Machine Commands Faulted)
Mach_Ctrl.Cmd.ABORT Module.OK
<WidgOmatic.Cmd.ABORT> <Gantry_X_Drive.OK> ONS[0].6 FLL
7 ONS Fill File
Source 0
Module OK (NOT
Dest ResetSEQ[0]
Faulted)
Length 4
Module.OK
<Gantry_X_Drive.OK> ONS[0].7
/ ONS MOV
Move
Source 1

Dest AbortSEQ[0]
0

(End)

Refer to the toolkit directory C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\6-Project Examples\


WidgOmatic folder for a complete example of a logic program.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 239


Appendix A Logic Program Overview

Notes:

240 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Appendix B

Logic Module Customization

The toolkit logic modules are designed with a basic set of machine states, faults, alarms, and reset logic common
to most applications. Knowing that specific application requirements dictate exceptions and additions, the
ability to customize is also included in the logic module design.

This appendix includes common modification recommendations for the customization of machine states, faults,
alarms, and reset logic.

Machine State Customization


You may wish to modify state names, add or remove states, or even change the relationship between states to fit
your application. The state machine logic resides in the R02_Monitor and R03_Control routines located in the
machine module.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 241


Appendix B Logic Module Customization

The application and device modules interact with the state machine via their R02_Monitor and R03_Control
routines.

For example, the device modules accept commands and react accordingly. Therefore, changes to the state
machine can impact the individual application and device modules. Refer to Appendix A, Logic Program
Overview, on page 225, for more information on the state machine and how it interacts with the application and
device modules.

The core for the state machine is built around the


UDT_MachCtrl data type.

The UDT_MachCtrl data type consists of three


sub data-types that directly impact the state
machine.
• Mode = UDT_MachMode
• Command = UDT_MachCmd
• State = UDT_MachState

242 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Module Customization Appendix B

Modifications to the state, command, or mode need to be made to the corresponding data types. For example, to
modify the state names, open and edit the UDT_MachState data type.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 243


Appendix B Logic Module Customization

Tag and Logic Modification Recommendations


This table contains some of the common modifications to consider for the state machine. The modifications and
corresponding recommended actions are meant to highlight the more significant updates that are needed.
Additional updates could also be necessary.
Modification Description Recommended Actions
• Modify the UDT_MachState data type.
Simple change to the state name. The number of states and relationship • Update the corresponding MachineSTATE_AOI embedded state
State Names between states remain unaltered. name. (1)
Example: Change RUNNING state to PRODUCING. • Update the HMI file as needed. (2)
Simple change to the command name. Their intended function remains
unaltered. • Modify the UDT_MachCmd data type.
Command Names • Update the HMI file as needed. (2)
Example: Change RESET command to INITIALIZE.
Simple change to the mode name. The number of modes and their
intended function remain unaltered. • Modify the UDT_MachMode data type.
Mode Names • Update the HMI file as needed. (2)
Example: Change OPERATOR mode to MANUAL.
• Modify the UDT_MachState data type.
• Modify the machine module monitor and control routines as needed.
Adding additional states or removing states. The operation of the state • If necessary, add/remove commands to support the changes in the
Add/Remove States machine will change to accommodate an increase or decrease in states. states. Refer to Add/Remove Commands modification.
Example: Add a new state called PAUSED. • If new states were added, then update the corresponding
MachineSTATE_AOI embedded state name.
• Update the HMI file as needed. (2)
• Modify the UDT_MachCmd data type.
Adding additional commands or removing commands. Typically, • Modify the machine module monitor and control routines as needed.
increases or decreases in commands are required to support • Modify the application and device modules monitor and control
corresponding changes (+/-) with states. routines as needed. Typically, changes in commands require changes
Add/Remove Commands in the module status (UDT_AppStatus and UDT_ModuleStatus). For
Example: Add a new command called PAUSE to support a new state example, if you add a new command called PAUSE, then you should
called PAUSED. add a new status response from the modules called Paused.
• Update the HMI file as needed. (2)
• Modify the UDT_MachMode data type.
Adding additional modes or removing modes. • Modify the machine module monitor and control routines as needed.
Add/Remove Modes • Modify the application and device modules monitor and control
Example: Add a new mode called THREAD. routines as needed.
• Update the HMI file as needed. (2)

Changing the conditions that enable transitions between states. • Modify the machine module monitor and control routines as needed.
• Modify the application and device modules monitor and control
State-to-State Relationships Example: Update logic to transition from STOPPED directly to STARTING, routines as needed.
bypassing IDLE. • Update the HMI file as needed. (2)
(1) Refer to State Display Tag Modifications, on page 245, for more information.
(2) Refer to Chapter 5, on page 101, for more information on the HMI terminal layout and function.

244 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Module Customization Appendix B

State Display Tag Modifications


Each instance of any MachineSTATE_AOI instruction contains an embedded string tag that sets the
Machine.StateDisplay tag following a state change. The Machine.StateDisplay tag is referenced by the HMI to
display the current or active machine state.

Follow these steps to modify the embedded string tag.

1. Right-click the AOI tag name and choose Open Instruction Logic.

2. Navigate to rung 5, right-click State_Name, and choose Monitor “State_Name”.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 245


Appendix B Logic Module Customization

3. Use the String Browser to modify or set the


State_Name.
The new state name should match the updated state
set by the MachineSTATE_AOI instruction. For
example, if the MachineSTATE_AOI instruction
places the machine into the
Machine.State.PRODUCING state, then the
corresponding State_Name tag should be set to
PRODUCING.
Each instance of any MachineSTATE_AOI needs to
be set or updated based on changes to the machine
states.

Bypass Idle State Modifications


By default, the state machine transitions from STOPPED to IDLE when Start is pressed on the HMI terminal.
While in IDLE, typically all of the modules are reset and ready to run. Sercos and CIP Motion axes, for example,
are enabled and holding position at this point. When Start is pressed a second time, the machine transitions from
IDLE to RUNNING and motion begins. If your machine is not required to dwell on the IDLE state, but instead
transitions to the RUNNING state, then make this edit:

1. Navigate to rung 5 in the R03_Control routine for the machine module.

2. Delete the XIC and ONS instructions.

The IDLE state was not removed. Instead, the state machine transitions instantly from IDLE into
STARTING without requiring a second start request. To you, the operator, it will appear as if the IDLE
state was removed or bypassed altogether.

246 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Module Customization Appendix B

Module Fault Customization


The application and device module R02_Monitor routines contain module fault logic.

Module faults are intended to act as a diagnostic tool to cover not only a drive or device fault, but also module
specific faults. You can add custom module fault logic to provide additional diagnostic information based on
your application. The default module specific faults are listed below.
Module Faults
Fault Description Module Usage Alarm History Fault Code
Drive Fault Device Module 1

Not Ready • Application Module 2


• Device Module
• Application Module
Failed to Clear 3
• Device Module
• Application Module
Failed to Reset 4
• Device Module
Failed to Start Application Module 5
Failed to Stop Application Module 6
Safety Fault Device Module 7
User Alarm Reserved 8…19 (1)
• Application Module
Instruction Error 20
• Device Module
(1) Alarm History fault codes 8…19 are placeholders. You can use them to quickly add custom user-defined module faults. Refer to Chapter 5, FactoryTalk View
ME Configuration, on page 101, for more information on the Alarm History faceplate and its function.

All of the device modules also contain a general drive fault. The Drive Fault is in addition to the drive specific
faults. For example, when a CIP Motion drive faults for an Excessive Position Error, both the drive specific fault
(Excessive Position Error) and general fault (Drive Fault) are displayed on the HMI Alarm History faceplate.
This general Drive Fault is also triggered when a drive faults, but does not provide specific fault information, for
example, PowerFlex 4-class drives.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 247


Appendix B Logic Module Customization

To add new module faults to the Alarm History faceplate, navigate to the fault trigger rungs and add the logic for
your new fault with the appropriate fault code number.

In addition to adding the logic for the new module faults, the alarm message within the HMI application needs
to be entered for the associated trigger value.

248 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logic Module Customization Appendix B

Alarm History Faceplate Logic Modification


The alarm history rungs, located in the application and device module R02_Monitor routines, support the HMI
Alarm History faceplate.

If your HMI application does not include the Alarm History faceplate, then you can remove this logic from the
monitor routine for each module. You can locate the Alarm History faceplate logic rungs just below the Alarm
History header, in the rung comments.

To remove logic, select Alarm History rungs in each R02_Monitor routine of each application and device
module and press the delete key or menu item.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 249


Appendix B Logic Module Customization

Coordinated Reset Customization


By default, each device module is pre-programmed with reset logic that is designed to prepare the module and
the devices it contains (drives, for example) to run. For a sercos or CIP Motion axis, this might mean the reset
logic will home the axis. This approach is well suited for applications where the individual device modules reset
independently. However, some applications require multiple device modules to reset in a coordinated manner.
For example, when two or more sercos and/or CIP Motion axes are homed in sequential order to avoid
mechanical interference.

The recommended method to achieve a coordinated reset is to remove the reset-sequence logic from each of
corresponding device module R04_Reset_Abort routines and insert it into the application R04_Reset routine.

The reset logic from each device module can be blended together into a single reset sequence in the application
module. Also, your application may contain device modules that can be reset independently while others may
need a coordinated reset. In these cases, you only need to relocate the reset logic for the device modules that
require the coordinated reset.

250 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Appendix C

Add Other Devices to the Equipment Status Faceplate

In this appendix you add devices that do not have pre-configured faceplates, such as a discrete device (solenoid or
valve).

Add Devices to the Equipment Status Faceplate


1. Go to the Object Explorer dialog box and select which Row_Group you wish to display the Non-
preconfigured Device in.
2. Find the DeviceName_String_x object for that row.

3. Double-click DeviceName_String_x object to open the String Display Properties and go to the
Connections tab.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 251


Appendix C Add Other Devices to the Equipment Status Faceplate

4. Assign a new controller tag by clicking the Tag browser and search for a controller tag containing the string
name you want to display or you can type a static name in the tag field by enclosing in quotes, for example,
“Furnace 1”.

5. Go to the State_MSI object and double-click to open its properties.

6. Click the States tab.

This Multistate Indicator has been pre-configured with 18 device states. When the tag assigned to the MSI
becomes a certain value, the MSI displays the appropriate caption.
7. You can use the pre-existing captions and create logic in your controller to move the appropriate value to
your device tag or edit the captions and values to meet your needs.

252 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Add Other Devices to the Equipment Status Faceplate Appendix C

8. Click the Connections tab and assign a device tag to


the MSI by clicking the Tag browser.
9. For your specific application, you may need to
consider deleting any states you are not using to
avoid any unwanted captions being displayed.
Lastly, there are four Value groups for each row that
contain a numeric display and a string object to
display units that you can configure.

10. Expand the Value1_Grp group.

11. Double-click the Value1_Str object to open its properties. Click the Connections tab and assign a tag to
the Numeric Display object.

12. Double-click the Units1_Str object to open its properties. Click the Connections tab and assign a tag in
the controller that contains a String for the units, or simply type in a static sting by enclosing in quotes. In
this example, “degrees” is the tag name.

13. Repeat step 11 and step 12 for each Valuex_Grp group in your row.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 253


Appendix C Add Other Devices to the Equipment Status Faceplate

Add Optional Faceplate Views


This example shows two additional faceplate toolbar buttons added to the Equipment Status faceplate that
toggle between the existing main Equipment_Status_Faceplate Group (Home Button) and a new Help Object
Group (Help Button).

1. Create a new object group, for example, HelpManual_Group, to be launched and add the objects within
that group you wish to display when Help toolbar button is pressed.

2. Right-click the new group and choose Animation>Visibility.


3. Set the Visibility animation to be true when the Set_EquipFaceplateAnimation tag in the AOI becomes a
certain value, for example, 1.

254 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Add Other Devices to the Equipment Status Faceplate Appendix C

4. Create an Interlocked Pushbutton on toolbar (see example) that will activate visibility of the new Object
Group.
5. Set the Connection or tag tied to this button to {#1.Set_EquipFaceplateAnimation}.

6. Set the button value to the number assigned in the group animation in step 3.

7. Create another Interlocked Pushbutton on the toolbar (Home button in this example) that will activate
visibility of the existing Equipment_Status_Faceplate Group.
The pre-configured visibility value for this group is 0.
8. Repeat step 1 through step 7 for additional faceplate object groups you wish to visually activate by faceplate
toolbar buttons.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 255


Appendix C Add Other Devices to the Equipment Status Faceplate

Notes:

256 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Appendix D

Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration

In this appendix you configure your personal computer and controller communication, configure your
controller, and create a new project using the Logix Designer application.

Configure Personal Computer Communication Properties


In this section you set and verify the IP address of the personal computer running your program.

Set the IP Address

1. On your desktop, right-click My Network


Places and select Properties.

2. Double-click Local Area Connection.

3. On the General tab, select Properties.


4. Verify Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is
checked and selected.
5. Click Properties.

6. Select Use the following IP address.


7. Enter the IP address and Subnet mask as
shown or enter your address.
8. Click OK.
9. Close all network windows.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 257


Appendix D Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration

Verify Your IP Address

1. From the Start menu, select Run.


The Run dialog box opens.

2. Enter cmd.
3. Click OK.
The Windows IP Configuration dialog box opens.

4. Enter ipconfig at the prompt.


5. Press Enter.
6. Verify that the IP address and Subnet Mask match what you entered.
If these numbers do not match what you entered, contact your network administrator.
7. Close the cmd.exe window.

258 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration Appendix D

Configure the EtherNet/IP Driver


1. Click the RSLinx icon in the system tool tray
to start the RSLinx Classic software.
2. From the Communications menu, choose
Configure Drivers.

The Configure Drivers dialog box opens.

3. From the Available Driver Types pull-down


menu, choose EtherNet/IP Driver.
4. Click Add New.

5. Click OK to accept the default name.

The Configure Driver dialog box opens.

6. Select Browse Local Subnet and associated


personal computer EtherNet/IP port.
7. Click OK.
The EtherNet/IP driver is added to the
Configured Drivers list.

8. Verify that the status of the driver indicates


Running.
9. Click Close.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 259


Appendix D Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration

Configure the Logix5000 Controller


Check the Web for Firmware Updates

Follow these steps to check for ControlFLASH firmware updates.

1. From the Start menu, launch the Studio 5000


Logix Designer application.

The Start Page opens.


2. Click the Resource Center icon on the Start Page.
3. Choose Downloads>Logix Firmware.

The Get Support Now webpage opens.

4. Click Control Hardware to access the controller firmware.


5. Follow the webpage instructions to download firmware.

260 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration Appendix D

Load the Controller Firmware


TIP This procedure shows how to load firmware in the controller using a serial connection. It is faster to load the firmware using an
EtherNet/IP connection. For details, see the controller installation instructions.

1. Apply input power to the CompactLogix controller power supply.


2. From the Tools menu, select ControlFLASH.

The Welcome to ControlFLASH dialog box


opens.
3. Click Next.
4. Select your controller catalog
number.
In this example, 1768-L43 is
the controller catalog number.
The steps to download other
Logix5000 controller firmware
are similar.
5. Click Next.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 261


Appendix D Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration

6. Under AB_DF1-1, select the


1768-L43 controller.
7. Click OK.

8. Move the controller keyswitch


to Program.

9. Compare the current drive firmware revision


to the latest revision listed.
If the Current Revision matches the newest
Revision listed, then your controller already
has the latest firmware and a firmware update
is not needed.
a. Click Cancel to abort the firmware
upgrade.
b. Go to Assign IP Addresses on page 263.
If the Current Revision does not match the
latest revision listed, click Next.

TIP If you are unsure which revision to use, select the latest.

10. Click Finish, then click Yes to start the


firmware update.
When the controller is updated, the status box
displays Update Complete.
11. Click Ok.
12. Click Cancel to close the ControlFLASH
software.
13. Click Yes.

262 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration Appendix D

Assign IP Addresses

The BOOTP/DHCP Server utility is used to assign IP addresses to most devices in this quick start, except the
PanelView Plus terminal. The BOOTP/DHCP utility is installed during the Logix Designer application
installation.

1. From the Start menu, launch the BOOTP/DHCP Server utility.

If you are running this utility for the first time, the
Network Setup Error dialog box opens.
a. Click OK.
b. Enter the subnet mask from step 7 on page 257.

If you are not running this utility for the first time,
select Tools>Network Settings.

2. Click OK.
The Request History field displays all devices in your
network that need IP addresses.
The EtherNet/IP (MAC) addresses correspond to the
pre-loaded addresses and typically are marked on the
device labels.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 263


Appendix D Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration

3. Double-click a request from one of the devices.

4. Enter a unique IP address for each device.


5. Click OK.
If you are not on an isolated network, obtain the IP addresses from your network administrator.
6. Repeat step 3 through step 5 for each device, except the PanelView Plus terminal.

IMPORTANT If you cycle power, the device will not retain its IP address unless you disable BOOTP/DHCP.

7. Select the first device in the Relation List field.

8. Click Disable BOOTP/DHCP.


9. Repeat step 7 through step 8 for all devices except the PanelView Plus terminal.
10. Close the BOOTP/DHCP utility.
If prompted to save changes, click No.

264 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration Appendix D

Browse the EtherNet/IP Network Devices

Follow these steps to verify that all your network devices are present in RSLinx Classic software.

1. Click the RSWho icon to view the EtherNet/IP


driver and devices on the network.
2. Verify that all your network devices are
detected.
In this example, there are five network devices. The network configuration for your specific application
will be different.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 265


Appendix D Logix Designer Communication and Controller Configuration

Notes:

266 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Appendix E

Create and Add BOM Device Modules


Without the DMAT Wizard

In this appendix you select an initial preconfigured BOM file without using the DMAT Wizard and import
BOM device modules to an existing ProposalWorks file.

Before You Begin


Collect specific application data, for example:
• System Input Voltage
• Ambient temperature and Altitude Specifications
• Transmission Type
• Motor data
• Load Data – Inertia and Cycle Profiles
• Other System Sizing Info

What You Need


• The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.
• PowerFlex Family Selection Guide, publication PFLEX-SG002.
• Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide, publication GMC-SG001.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 267


Appendix E Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard

Follow These Steps


Complete the following steps to create a bill of materials and size your drives and motion system components.

Start

Select Initial BOM Files

page 268

Add BOM Device Modules

page 270

Select Initial BOM Files


Follow these steps to select your initial BOM files.

1. Open and rename the initial ProposalWorks BOM file.


a. Navigate to and select the appropriate voltage class directory, based on your system power voltage,
within the BOM development folder.
For the Widg-O-matic example, 400 VAC Class directory is selected.

The Voltage Class System Start folder opens.

268 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix E

b. Double-click the ProposalWorks Initial ProposalWorks File Selection


file based on your power ProposalWorks Initial BOM Distribution Equipment Overcurrent Protection
distribution hardware preferences. File Type Type
xxxVAC w-IEC CB-L.prp IEC Circuit breaker
xxxVAC w-IEC Fused-L.prp IEC Fuse
UL, using Line Interface Circuit breaker with
xxxVAC w-LIM-L.prp
Module (LIM) LIM module
xxxVAC w-UL CB-L.prp UL Circuit breaker
xxxVAC w-UL Fused-L.prp UL Fuse

For the Widg-O-matic application


example, the 400VAC w-LIM-
L.prp file is selected.

ProposalWorks software launches and


the selected file opens.

The initial BOM files


include power and control
distribution equipment,
control circuit protection,
operator devices, and
terminal blocks.

2. Rename project title in the Title field.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 269


Appendix E Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard

For the Widg-O-matic application example,


the 400 Class VAC with LIM Initial BOM
file was renamed Widgomatic_BOM.

3. Rename and save the BOM project file.


a. Click the File menu and choose Save As.

b. Type a new BOM project file name.


By creating a new BOM project file
specifically for your application, you
preserve the initial toolkit BOM file for
future reference.
In this example, the 400 Class VAC with
LIM Initial BOM file was renamed
WidgOmatic_BOM.

Add BOM Device Modules


Follow these steps to add BOM device modules.

1. Import drive BOM files.


a. Click File and choose Utilities>Import.

The Import Equipment List from File dialog box opens.

270 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix E

b. Navigate to the 2-BOM Dev folder


within the toolkit’s Files folder.
Your personal computer’s harddrive path
is C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\
DMAT\B-Files\2-BOM Dev.
c. Double-click the 2_ 200V Class Drives or
4_400V Class Drives folder based on
your system power voltage.
For the Widg-O-matic machine
application example, the 4_400V Class
Drives folder is selected.

d. Select the file matching your initial drive


family included in your application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine
application example, the 480VAC
K6500-L file.prp file is selected for the
two Kinetix 6500 X-Y gantry drives in
system.
e. Click Open.
The Import Completion Confirmation
dialog box opens.
f. Click OK.

The selected drive equipment is added to


the end of the initial BOM file.
2. Repeat step 1 for each drive family in your
system.
For the Widg-O-matic application example,
the 480VAC PF753-L.prp and 480VAC
K300-L.prp Drive BOM files are also
imported into the initial BOM file to
accommodate the conveyor and diverter
drives in the system.

3. Import controller and I/O BOM files.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 271


Appendix E Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard

a. Click File and choose Utilities>Import.

The Import Equipment List from File dialog box opens.


b. Navigate to the 2-BOM Dev folder
within the toolkit’s Files folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\2-BOM Dev.
c. Double-click the 5_Controllers and IO folder.
d. Select the CompactLogix Module-L.prp
or ControlLogix Module-L.prp file based
on the controller family required for your
application.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the ControlLogix Module-L.prp file is selected
for support of the two Kinetix 6500 CIP Motion drives in the system.

272 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix E

A variety of Logix5000 controllers can be used in your drives and motion application. Logix5000
controller selection is based on drive capacity and general performance. Refer to the Controller and
Drive Capacity table and the appropriate selection guide to assist in controller selection.
Controller and Drive Capacity
EtherNet/IP CIP Motion Sercos interface Drives
Drives
Kinetix 6200, Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 300 Drives PowerFlex Drives
Logix5000 (1) Kinetix 6000M,
Controller Type Kinetix 6500 Kinetix 2000, Kinetix 7000,
and Ultra3000
Drives, (2) max Drives, (2) max Drives, (2) max Drives, (2) max
1768-L2x – – 6 6
1768-L3x – – 16 16
1768-L43, – 4 20 32
1768-L43S
1768-L45, – 8 20 32
1768-L45S
1756-L6x, (3)
100 100 128 128
1756-L6xS (3)
1756-L7x (3) 100 100 128 128
(1) Based on controller firmware, revision 18, and RSLogix 5000 software, version 18.
(2) Maximum drive quantity based on CIP or TCP connections and I/O packets for a singe communication module.
(3) Based on 1756-ENxTx EtherNet/IP communication module.
pen

e. Click open.
The Import Completion Confirmation dialog box opens.
f. Click OK.

The selected controller and corresponding I/O hardware is added to the end of the initial BOM file.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 273


Appendix E Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard

4. Import HMI BOM files.


a. Click File and choose Utilities>Import.

The Import Equipment List from File dialog box opens.


b. Navigate to the 2-BOM Dev folder within the toolkit’s Files folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\2-BOM Dev.
c. Double-click the 6_HMI folder.

274 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix E

d. Select the PVP 6 in Module-L.prp or PVP 10 in Module-L.prp file based on the relative size of your
PanelView Plus required for your application.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the PVP 10 in Module-L.prp file is selected for
support of a PanelView Plus 1000 terminal in the system.
e. Click Open.
The Import Completion Confirmation dialog box opens.
f. Click OK.
The selected PanelView Plus hardware
is added to the end of the initial BOM
file.
5. Import the Ethernet communication
BOM file.
a. Click File and choose Utilities>Import.

The Import Equipment List from File dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 275


Appendix E Create and Add BOM Device Modules Without the DMAT Wizard

b. Navigate to the 2-BOM Dev folder


within the toolkit’s Files folder.
Your personal computer’s harddrive path
is C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\
DMAT\B-Files\2-BOM Dev.
c. Double-click the 8_Comms folder.

d. Select the Stratix Ethernet Switch-L.prp


file.
e. Click Open.

The Import Completion Confirmation dialog box opens.


f. Click OK.

The Ethernet switch and cable hardware is added to the end of the initial BOM file.
6. Save your assembled BOM file.

276 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Appendix F

Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard

This appendix provides you with the steps necessary to assemble a project drawing set from the toolkit library
without using the DMAT Wizard.

The libraries are organized into power, control, safety, I/O, and communication wiring/panel layout sections.
These steps let you easily assemble all of the wiring and layout drawings for your specific system and minimize
editing of your drawing set.

TIP If you do not have CAD software that is compatible with the dwg/dxf formats, the pdf files provide an excellent reference library for
wiring all your system devices.

Before You Begin


Complete your system layout and wiring (refer to Chapter 2).

What You Need


• Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.
• AutoCAD Electrical software to open the DWG or DXF files
• Adobe Reader software to open PDF files
• Line Interface Module Installation Instructions, publication 2094-IN005
• System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001
• System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Video, publication GMC-SP004
• The user manual for your Drives and Motion hardware. Refer to Additional Resources on page 15 for
publication numbers.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 277


Appendix F Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard

Follow These Steps


Complete the following steps to configure your Logix5000 integrated motion application.

Start

Select Drive Power Drawings

page 279

Select Controller Power Drawings

page 281

Select External Safety Relay


Option Drawings
page 282

Select Drive I/O Drawings

page 283

Select Controller I/O Drawings

page 284

Select System
Communication Drawings
page 286

Select System Layout Drawings

page 287

Select Power and Control


Component Layout Footprint
Drawings

page 289

278 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix F

Select Drive Power Drawings


1. Create a project folder.
For the Widg-O-matic machine example,
the Widgomatic folder was created.

2. Browse to the CAD


Drawing Libraries
folder on the Drives
and Motion toolkit
DVD.
3. Navigate to the
desired file type
(DWG, DXF, or
PDF) folder and
select Power Section.

4. Double-click the
voltage folder matching your system
voltage.
For the Widg-O-matic example, the
460_VAC folder was opened.

5. Double-click the folder matching the


initial drive family included in your
application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine
application example, the Kinetix 6500
drive folder was opened.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 279


Appendix F Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard

Copy the power drawing for your


drive family based on the Power
Distribution Layout table.

Power Distribution Layout


Power Distribution Layout Options Power Drawing
Initial drives including a Bulletin 2094 line interface module (LIM) for main power/control distribution 010_xxxx_xxxVAC_w_LIM.xxx
(includes 3 drives)
Initial drives including traditional main power distribution components (includes 3 drives) 010_xxxx_xxxVAC_wo_LIM.xxx
Additional drive drawings without main power distribution components (includes 4 drives) 020_xxxx_xxxVAC_Additional_Drives.xxx

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the Kinetix 6500 drawing with LIM module was
selected. Because the Kinetix 6500 drive is the initial drive family, a LIM module was selected as the main
power distribution component. The LIM module can also supply power to the other drives in the system.
6. Paste the drawing you copied into
the Project Drawings folder.

7. Copy and paste the 020_xxxx_xxxVAC_Additional_Drives.xxx drawing if you have more than three
drives of the same family and for every four additional drives you have in your system.
8. Repeat step 5 through step 7 for every drive family in your system.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the following drawings were copied to accommodate
the two Kinetix 6500 servo drives, one PowerFlex 753 drive, and one Kinetix 300 drive.

280 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix F

Select Controller Power Drawings


1. Navigate to the desired (DWG, DXF,
or PDF) file type folder on the toolkit
DVD and select Control Section.

2. Double-click the controller folder


matching your actual Rockwell
Automation Logix5000 controller
based on the Logix5000 Controller
Selection table.

Logix5000 Controller Selection


Logix5000 Controller Options Supported Drive Families Controller Folder
All PowerFlex drives and all sercos and CIP motion
ControlLogix or GuardLogix controllers 1756-CLX_GLX
drives
All PowerFlex drives and all sercos interface drives
L4x CompactLogix or L4xS Compact GuardLogix controllers 1768_CMLX_GMLX
up to 8 drives, total
L3x CompactLogix or L3xS Compact GuardLogix controllers All PowerFlex drives 1769_CMLX_GMLX

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 1756_CLX_GLX folder was chosen because
only the ControlLogix platform currently supports the Kinetix 6500 CIP motion drives.
3. Copy the controller drawing for
your actual controller platform
based on the Controller Power
Distribution Layout table.

Controller Power Distribution Layout


Controller Power Distribution Layout Options Power Drawing
120V AC controller power supply 03x_xxxx_xxx_120VAC_Control_Power.xxx
24V DC controller power supply when using a LIM module for main power/control 04x_xxxx_xxx_24VDC_Control_w_LIM.xxx
24V DC controller power supply when using traditional power distribution components for main power/control 04x_xxxx_xxx_24VDC_Control_wo_LIM.xxx

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 120V AC drawing was chosen.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 281


Appendix F Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard

4. Paste the drawing into your Project Drawings folder.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application


example, the 030_CLX_GLX_120VAC_Control
Power.dwg file was copied to accommodate the
ControlLogix controller.

5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 for every controller


family in your system.

Select External Safety Relay Option Drawings


1. Navigate to the desired (DWG, DXF,
or PDF) file type folder on the toolkit
DVD and select Safety Section.

2. Copy the External Safety Relay


Option drawings for your specific
system hardware.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, no external safety drawings were selected because the
built-in drive safety I/O was used.

282 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix F

3. Paste the drawing into your Project Drawings


folder.

Select Drive I/O Drawings


1. Navigate to the desired (DWG, DXF,
or PDF) file type folder on the toolkit
DVD and select Drive I/O Section.

2. Double-click the folder matching your


initial drive family.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application
example, the K6500 folder was selected for the
Kinetix 6500 drives.

3. Copy the drive I/O drawings required for your


specific application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application
example, all of the drive I/O drawings were
selected.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 283


Appendix F Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard

4. Paste the drawings into your Project Drawings folder.


5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 for every drive in your system with
safety options.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the following


drive I/O drawings were copied to accommodate the two
Kinetix 6500 servo drives, one PowerFlex 753 drive, and one
Kinetix 300 drive.

Select Controller I/O Drawings


1. Navigate to the desired (DWG, DXF, or PDF) file type folder on the toolkit DVD and select Controller
I/O Section.

2. Double-click the folder matching your Controller I/O.


For the Widg-O-matic machine application
example, the 1756_IO_CLX_GLX folder was
selected supporting the 1756 ControlLogix
controller I/O modules.

284 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix F

3. Copy the controller I/O drawings required for your specific application.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, all of the 1756 I/O drawings were selected.
4. Paste the drawings into your Project Drawings folder.

5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 for every unique controller in your system.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the following controller I/O drawings were copied
to accommodate the 1756 ControlLogix controller I/O.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 285


Appendix F Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard

Select System Communication Drawings


1. Navigate to the desired (DWG, DXF, or PDF) file type folder on the toolkit DVD and select
Communications Section.

2. Double-click the folder matching your drive communication network.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the Ethernet folder was selected supporting Ethernet
communication on the two Kinetix 6500 servo drives, one PowerFlex 753 drive, and one Kinetix 300 drive.
3. Copy the communication network
drawing required for your drive
communication.

4. Paste the drawings into your Project


Drawings folder.

5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 for your HMI and other device communication in your system, if different
than your drive communication network.

286 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix F

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the Ethernet


communication drawing was copied to accommodate all of the
drives and HMI terminals in the system.

Select System Layout Drawings


1. Navigate to the desired (DWG, DXF, or PDF) file type folder on the toolkit DVD and select Layouts
Section.

2. Double-click the 01_Enclosure_Layouts folder and


open either the Large (60”x60”x12”) or Small
(60”x36”x12”) enclosure folder based on your
system enclosure needs.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the Small enclosure folder was selected.

3. Right-click the 140_xx_Enclosure_Layout.xxx drawing required for your application and choose Copy.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 287


Appendix F Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard

4. Paste the enclosure layout drawing into your Project


Drawings folder.

5. Double-click the 02_Subpanel_Layouts folder and


open either the Large (Approx. 56”x 56”) or Small
(57”x 33”) subpanel folder based on your enclosure
selection and system subpanel needs.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application


example, the Small subpanel folder was selected.
6. Right-click the appropriate drawing, based on the
Subpanel Selection Layout table, and choose Copy.

Subpanel Selection Layout


Logix5000 Controller Family Power Distribution Layout Sub-panel Drawing

ControlLogix or GuardLogix LIM module for three-phase/control power distribution 150_CLX_w_LIM_xx_Panel_Layout.xxx


Controllers Traditional three-phase/control power distribution components 150_CLX_wo_LIM_xx_Panel_Layout.xxx

CompactLogix or Compact LIM module for three-phase/control power distribution 150_CMLX_w_LIM_xx_Panel_Layout.xxx


GuardLogix Controllers Traditional three-phase/control power distribution components 150_CMLX_wo_LIM_xx_Panel_Layout.xxx

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 150_CLX_w_LIM_Sm_Panel_Layout.dwg file


was selected.

288 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix F

7. Paste the subpanel drawing into your Project Drawings


folder.
8. Repeat step 2 through step 7 for every unique enclosure you
have in your system.

Select Power and Control Component Layout Footprint Drawings


1. Navigate to the desired (DWG, DXF, or PDF) file type folder on the toolkit DVD and select Layouts
Section.

2. Double-click the 03_Poweflex_Footprints, 04_Kinetix_Footprints, 05_Power_Component_Footprints,


or 06_PanelView_Plus_Footprints folder to access the corresponding power or control component
footprints within your system for later insertion into your subpanel or communication drawings.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 03_Poweflex_Footprints folder was initially
selected.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 289


Appendix F Assemble Project Drawing Set Without the DMAT Wizard

3. Copy the footprint drawings that match your specific component’s family or series.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the 320_PF750_Series_Footprints.dwg file was
copied to accommodate the layout of the PowerFlex 753 drive onto the Subpanel.
4. Paste the drawing or drawings into your Project
Drawings folder.

5. Repeat step 2 through step 4 to select your other Kinetix,


Power Component, and PanelView Plus footprint
drawings.

These project library drawing files comprise the initial


drawing set used to create the Widg-O-matic machine
application project drawings.

290 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Appendix G

Controller, Network, and Device Configuration


Without the DMAT Wizard

In this appendix you configure your controller, network, and device hardware; then import the machine,
application, and device modules into your Logix Designer application without using the DMAT Wizard or
making edits after the initial file is created.

Before You Begin


• Complete your system architecture and hardware selection (refer to Chapter 1 and Appendix E).
• Complete your system layout and wiring (refer to Chapter 3 and Appendix F).

What You Need


• The Drives and Motion Accelerator Toolkit DVD, publication IASIMP-SP017. For a copy of the DVD,
contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative.
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 18.0 or later, or the Logix Designer application, version 21.0 or later, for
Kinetix 300, Kinetix 6500, PowerFlex 753, and PowerFlex 525 drives.
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 19.0 or later, or the Logix Designer application, version 21.0 or later, for
PowerFlex 755 CIP Motion drives and ArmorStart distributed motor controllers.
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.0 or later, or the Logix Designer application, version 21.0 or later, for
Kinetix 350 servo drives.
• Logix Designer application, version 24.0 or later, for PowerFlex 527 drives.
• Sercos and Analog Motion Configuration and Startup User Manual, publication MOTION-UM001
• CIP Motion Configuration and Startup User Manual, publication MOTION-UM003
• ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade Kit Quick Start, publication 1756-QS105
• The user manual for your Drives and Motion hardware. Refer to Additional Resources on page 15 for
publication numbers.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 291


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Follow These Steps


Complete the following steps to configure your Logix5000 integrated motion application.

Start

Kinetix 300 Drive Configuration


Controller and Network
Configuration
page 331
page 293

Create a New Project File E3 Plus Overload Relay with


Communication Auxiliary
Configuration
page 293
page 343
Configure the Ethernet Module
E300 Overload Relay Configuration
page 295
page 345
Configure the Sercos Module

page 296 Optional Step SMC-50 Soft Starter Configuration


Complete if sercos drives are
used in your application. page 347

ArmorStart Distributed Motor


Save the Project File Controller Configuration

page 298 page 352

Device Configuration
Import and Configure Logic Modules

page 299 page 356

PowerFlex Drive Configuration Import and Configure the


Machine Logic Module
page 299 page 356

CIP Motion Drive Configuration Import and Configure


Application Logic Modules
page 315 For Kinetix 6500, Kinetix 5500, Kinetix 350,
and PowerFlex 755 CIP Motion Drives page 360

Import and Configure


Sercos Motion Drive Configuration Device Logic Modules
page 364
page 326 For Kinetix 6200, Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 6000M,
Kinetix 2000, or Ultra3000 Sercos Drives

292 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Controller and Network Configuration


In this section you configure your controller, create a new project file, and setup communication for your Drives
and Motion application.

Create a New Project File


Throughout this chapter the controller and network configuration procedures are written specifically for a
1756-L7x ControlLogix controller and Bulletin 1756 communication modules. Steps for other Logix5000
controllers and communication modules are similar.

IMPORTANT For best performance, 1756-L7x ControlLogix controllers are recommended for use with CIP motion drive systems.

IMPORTANT If you are creating a new project and have not configured your personal computer communication or controller hardware, refer to
Appendix D, beginning on page 257.

1. From the Start menu, launch the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application.

2. Click New Project.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 293


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

The New Controller dialog box opens.

3. Configure the new controller.


a. From the Type pull-down menu, choose the controller type.
b. From the Revision pull-down menu, choose the revision.
c. Type the file Name.
d. From the Chassis Type pull-down menu, choose the chassis.
e. Enter the Logix5000 processor slot (leftmost slot = 0).
4. Click OK.
5. From the Edit menu, choose Controller Properties.
The Controller Properties dialog box opens.
6. Click the Date/Time tab.
7. Check Enable Time Synchronization.
This enables time synchronization for the
controller. Time synchronization is needed
for CIP Motion.

IMPORTANT All controllers and communication


modules must have time
synchronization enabled to participate
in CIP Sync.

8. Click OK.

294 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Configure the Ethernet Module


Follow these steps to configure Ethernet communication for your HMI terminal, PowerFlex drive, Kinetix 300,
Kinetix 5500, and Kinetix 6500 servo drives.

1. Expand I/O Configuration in the Controller


Organizer.
2. Right-click I/O Configuration and choose New
Module.

The Select Module dialog box opens.


3. Expand the Communications category and select
your 1756 Ethernet module.
For systems using Integrated Motion on the
EtherNet/IP network, 1756-EN2x or 1756-EN3x
module are required.
In this example, the 1756-EN2TR module is
selected.
4. Click OK.
The New Module dialog box opens.
5. Configure the new module.
a. Type the module Name.
b. Enter the Logix5000 EtherNet/IP
module slot (leftmost slot = 0).
c. Select an Ethernet Address option.
In this example, the Private
Network address is selected.
d. Enter the address of your
EtherNet/IP module.

In this example, the last octet of the address is 10.


6. Click Change in the Module Definition area.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 295


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

The Module Definition dialog box opens.


7. From the Time Sync Connection pull-down
menu, choose Time Sync and Motion.

IMPORTANT Time Sync functionality is what enables motion control on an Ethernet network. Without this setting, you won’t be able to
run your motion application.

8. Click OK to close the Module Definition dialog box.


9. Click Yes when prompted to confirm your module
definition changes.
10. Click OK to close the New Module dialog box.

Your new module appears under the I/O


Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer.

Configure the Sercos Module


Follow these steps to configure sercos communication,
for Kinetix 6200, Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 6000M, Kinetix 2000, Kinetix 7000, or Ultra3000 sercos drives used in
your application.

1. Right-click I/O Configuration in the Controller Organizer and choose New Module.
The Select Module dialog box opens.
2. Expand the Motion category and select
1756-MxxSE or 1768-M04SE as appropriate
for your actual hardware configuration.
In this example, the 1756-M16SE module is
selected.
3. Click OK.

296 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

The New Module dialog box opens.


4. Configure the new module.
a. Type the module Name.
b. Enter the Logix5000 sercos module slot
(leftmost slot = 0).
c. Check Open Module Properties.
5. Click OK.
Your new module appears under the I/O
Configuration folder in the Controller
Organizer.

6. Click the SERCOS Interface tab and


reference the Sercos Data Rate table.

Sercos Data Rate


Logix5000 Sercos Module Number of Axes Data Rate
1756-M03SE Up to 3
1756-M08SE Up to 8
4 or 8 Mbps
1756-M16SE Up to 16
1768-M04SE Up to 4

7. From the Data Rate pull-down menu, match the DIP switch setting on the drive module or choose Auto
Detect.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 297


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

8. From the Cycle Time pull-down menu, choose the Cycle Time according to this table.
Sercos Cycle Time
Data Rate Number of Axes Cycle Time
Up to 2 0.5 ms
Up to 4 1 ms
4 Mbps
Up to 8 2 ms
No support for axes 9…16
Up to 4 0.5 ms
8 Mbps Up to 8 1 ms
Up to 16 2 ms

TIP The number of axes/module is limited to the number of axes as shown in step 6.

9. From the Transmit Power pull-down menu, match the DIP switch setting on the drive module.
10. Enter the Transition to Phase setting.
The Transition to Phase default setting is 4 (phase 4). The Transition to Phase setting stops the ring in the
phase specified.
11. Click OK to close the Modules Properties dialog box.

Save the Project File


When you configured the ControlLogix controller you named your (.acd) application file. In this example, the
file name is WidgOmatic. Before closing the Logix Designer application, save your file.

Click to save your Logix Designer application file.

298 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Device Configuration
In this section you configure your Drives and Motion hardware by using the Logix Designer application and
MotionView OnBoard software.

To assist you in device configuration, the Widg-O-matic machine application example is referenced in the device
configuration steps. Two servo drives are configured for the X-Y gantry assembly section, one PowerFlex drive is
configured for the conveyor, and one Kinetix 300 drive is configured for the packaging diverter.
Widg-O-matic Machine Application Example

Assembly

X-Y Gantry

X-Servo
Packaging

Y-Servo Conveyor

r
oto
c t ion M
I ndu

Diverter
en
riv
r D d er
Moto Cylin
vo ric
Ser Elect
300

755

Kinetix 6500 PowerFlex 753 Kinetix 300


Drives Drive Drive

PowerFlex Drive Configuration


PowerFlex drive configuration applies to all 4-class and 7-class drives and includes these procedures:
• Update PowerFlex Add-On Profiles
• PowerFlex 525 Add-On Profiles
• Add and Configure PowerFlex Drives
• Set PowerFlex Drive Parameters
• Download Drive Parameters

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 299


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Update PowerFlex Add-On Profiles


IMPORTANT The PowerFlex Add-On Profiles are independent of RSLogix 5000 software or Logix Designer application releases. Update your
PowerFlex Add-On Profiles to make sure your application runs correctly.

Add-On profiles (AOP) are available for download at the Custom Downloads Add-On Profiles website:
https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/download.aspx?downloadid=addonprofiles

Follow these steps to download PowerFlex Add-On profiles.

1. Login to the Custom Download Add-On Profiles website.


The Custom Download Files dialog box opens.

2. Check the AOP for Drives-PowerFlex 755/CIP Motion profile and/or the AOP for
Drives-PowerFlex/SCANport™ profile, as required per your project.
3. Click Download Now and accept the user license agreement.

300 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

If prompted to install the Download Manager, allow the installation

4. Note the location of the download folder.

5. Extract the AOP zip file and run Setup.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 301


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

PowerFlex 525 Add-On Profiles


IMPORTANT The PowerFlex 525 Add-On Profiles are independent of the Custom Download AOP files. Update your PowerFlex Add-On Profiles to
make sure your application runs correctly.

The PowerFlex 525 Add-On Profile is available for download at the Allen-Bradley Web Updates website:
http://www.ab.com/support/abdrives/webupdate/index.html

Follow these steps to download PowerFlex 525 Add-On profile.

1. Go to the Allen-Bradley Web Updates website.


The Allen-Bradley Web Updates dialog box opens.

2. Click PowerFlex 525.

3. Click Add-On Profiles for RSLogix 5000/Studio 5000 are included in the Drives AOP>
PowerFlex 525 AOP (v1.01) and follow the download instructions.
4. Extract the RA_PF5ClassAOP_Ver_1.01 zip file and run the MPSetup file.

302 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Add and Configure PowerFlex Drives


Follow these steps to add and configure each individual drive you intend to have in your system. For the
Widg-O-matic machine application example, you configure a PowerFlex 753 drive.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file created in the previous section (for the Widgomatic example, the
project file name was Widgomatic.acd).
2. Expand the I/O Configuration
folder in the Controller
Organizer and browse to the
controller backplane.
3. Right-click the network
communication module for your
PowerFlex drive and select New
Module.
For the Widg-O-matic example,
the 1756-EN2TR module is
selected.
The Select Module dialog box
opens.
4. Expand the Drives category and
select the appropriate PowerFlex
drive module.

For the Widg-O-matic example, the PowerFlex 753 drive is selected for the conveyor drive.
5. Click OK.
The New Module dialog box opens.
6. Configure the new module.
a. Type the module Name.
b. Select an Ethernet Address
option.
In this example, the Private
Network address is selected.
7. In the Module Definition field click
Change.
The Module Definition dialog box
opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 303


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

8. Configure module definitions.


The Module Definition dialog box lets you configure and access drive data beyond standard I/O. Four
examples are shown.
a. Enter major and minor revisions appropriate for your drive hardware.
b. Enter drive rating appropriate for your drive hardware and AC input voltage.
c. Set datalink definitions for the intended drive.

IMPORTANT The datalinks listed for their respective drives must be configured exactly as shown for successful faceplate AOI import and
operation. If additional datalinks are required for your application, modifications to the corresponding AOIs may be
required.

d. Check Use Network Reference.

IMPORTANT Use Network Reference must be checked to automatically set the speed reference, DPI™, and start source parameters to
the Ethernet port.
To configure the PowerFlex 525 drive to accept commands and report status via an Ethernet network, set
P046 - [Start Source 1] and P047 - [Speed Reference 1] to EtherNet/IP.

304 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

e. Click OK to close the Module Definition dialog box.


This Module Definition example applies to PowerFlex 750 Series drive datalinks and specifically shows the
PowerFlex 753 module definitions for the Widg-O-matic machine example.

This Module Definition example applies to PowerFlex 70, PowerFlex 70EC, and PowerFlex 700 datalinks.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 305


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

This Module Definition example applies to PowerFlex 700S 2P datalinks.

IMPORTANT The PowerFlex 4-class drives do not support datalinks. Therefore, the corresponding PowerFlex 4 faceplates do not require
datalink configuration.

This Module Definition example applies to the PowerFlex 4-class drives.

IMPORTANT For PowerFlex 4-class drive configuration, in addition to checking Use Network Reference, you must also check Use
Network Start to control the drive from the Ethernet network port.

306 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

This Module Definition example applies to the PowerFlex 525 EENET drives.

IMPORTANT The PowerFlex 525 drive supports up to four (4) datalinks IN and OUT, but is not required for the PowerFlex 525
faceplate functionality. The Output Current datalink is used to provide a reference/placeholder in the logic of the device
module to scale datalink values accordingly.

9. Click OK to close the New Module dialog box.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 307


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Set PowerFlex Drive Parameters


PowerFlex drive parameter settings are specific to your application and should be reviewed carefully before
running your drive application. In this procedure, you use the Startup Wizard to set the most commonly
configured parameters.

1. Right click the PowerFlex drive under I/O Configuration and choose Properties.

For the Widg-O-matic example, the PowerFlex 753 drive is selected.


The Module Properties dialog box opens.

2. Click the Drive tab.


The Drive tab dialog box opens.
3. Click (startup wizard).
The Startup Wizard provides access to commonly used parameter groups and helps you setup the drive for
the connected motor.
The Available Wizards dialog box opens.
4. Select the Startup Wizard and Click Select.
For the Widg-O-matic machine application
example, the PowerFlex 753 Startup Wizard
was chosen.
5. Click Yes when the Wizard Launch Confirmation dialog box opens.

308 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

The Startup Wizard dialog box opens. These steps guide you through configuration of the most critical
PowerFlex 753 parameter groups. Other PowerFlex drives may have fewer parameter groups.
6. Click Next to proceed through the Welcome, Reset Parameters and System Time wizard steps.

The Motor Control wizard step opens.

7. Select the appropriate Motor Control Mode and Feedback options for your application.

TIP If motor is unavailable at setup time, select Simulator Fdbk to use the internal simulation feedback capabilities of the
drive.

8. Click Next.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 309


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

The Motor Data wizard step opens.

9. Enter motor data values appropriate for your application.


10. Click Next to proceed through Stop Mode, Direction Test, AutoTune, and Inertia AutoTune wizard steps.
The Ramp Rates / Speed Limits wizard step opens.

11. Enter the Max/Min Forward Speed, Max/Min Reverse Speed, and Acceleration/Deceleration parameters
as appropriate for your application.
12. Click Next.

310 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

The Speed Reference wizard step opens.


13. Set the Speed Reference parameters
appropriate for your application and drive
hardware.

TIP The drive speed reference parameter is automatically set when Use Network Reference is checked in the Module Definition
dialog box. Refer to step 8 on page 304.

14. Continue to Click Next until you reach the Applied and Pending Changes wizard step.
All applied and pending changes are listed.

15. Click to print your list of changes.


16. Click Finish to accept the changes.

17. Click OK in the Module Properties dialog box to save the drive configuration.

18. Click to save your Logix Designer application file.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 311


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Download Drive Parameters


IMPORTANT Before downloading drive parameters, you must configure personal computer communication properties and EtherNet/IP driver.
Refer to Appendix D on page 257 for more information.

1. Expand the I/O Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer.

2. Right-click your PowerFlex drive and select Properties.


The Module Properties dialog box opens.

3. On the Drive tab, click the Download Parameter icon.

312 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

This Drive tab applies to the PowerFlex 525 drives.

The Connect To Drive dialog box opens.


4. Expand the Ethernet communication
tree and select the desired PowerFlex
drive.
5. Click OK.
Multiple data download status dialog
boxes open. Download may take
several minutes.
The I/O Configuration Differences dialog box opens.

This I/O configuration dialog box applies to all PowerFlex drives (except PowerFlex 525).

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 313


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

This I/O configuration dialog box applies


to the PowerFlex 525 drives.
To Configure Go To
PowerFlex 525 drives step a
All other PowerFlex drives step 6

a. Click Download.
b. Click OK.
c. Click OK to close the Module
Properties dialog box.
d. Skip to step 11.
6. Click Use Project.
7. Click Continue.
The Select Devices To Download dialog
box opens.
Project devices that are different than the
target drive devices are checked
automatically.

8. Click Download.

9. Click Continue.

10. Click OK to close the Module Properties


dialog box.

11. Click to save your Logix Designer


application file.

314 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

CIP Motion Drive Configuration


CIP Motion drive configuration applies to all Kinetix 6500 drive modules, Kinetix 5500 drives, Kinetix 350
drives, PowerFlex 527, and PowerFlex 755 CIP Motion drives. These procedures are included:
• Configure CIP Motion Drive Modules
• Configure the Motion Group
• Configure Axis Properties

These CIP motion drive configuration steps were written specifically for Kinetix 6500 drives. The Kinetix 5500,
Kinetix 350, PowerFlex 527, and PowerFlex 755 CIP Motion drive configuration steps are similar. Examples for
each drive family are given when significant differences exist.

For more information on drive configuration, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in Additional Resources
on page 15.

Configure CIP Motion Drive Modules


Required Configuration Software
Drive Family Drive Cat. No. Configuration Software Version
RSLogix 5000 18 or later
Kinetix 6500 2094-EN02D-M01-Sx, 2094-BCxx-Mxx-M, and 2094-BMxx-M
Logix Designer application 21 or later
Kinetix 5500 2198-Hxxx-ERS Logix Designer application 21 or later
RSLogix 5000 20 or later
Kinetix 350 2097-V3xPRx-LM
Logix Designer application 21 or later
RSLogix 5000 19 or later
PowerFlex 755 CIP Motion drives
Logix Designer application 21 or later
PowerFlex 527 25C-xN1x4 Logix Designer application 24 or later

Follow these steps to configure the CIP Motion drive modules.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file created in Appendix F.


2. Expand the I/O Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer
and browse to the controller backplane.
3. Right-click the network communication module for your CIP
Motion drive and choose New Module.
For the Widg-O-matic example, the 1756-EN2TR module is
selected.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 315


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

The Select Module dialog box opens.

4. Expand the Motion category and select your CIP Motion module as appropriate for your actual hardware
configuration.
For the Widg-O-matic example, the 2094-EN02D-M01-S1 control module is selected for both axes of the
X-Y Gantry.
5. Click OK.
The New Module dialog box
opens.
6. Configure the new control
module.
a. Type the module Name.
b. Select an Ethernet Address
option.
In this example, the Private
Network address is selected.
c. Enter the address of your
EtherNet/IP module.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the last octet of the IP address is given in this table. The
value you enter here must match the base node address of the Kinetix 6500 IAM power module,
Widg-O-matic X-Y Gantry Ethernet Address Configuration
Module Name Ethernet IP Address
Gantry_X_Drive 191.168.1.31
Gantry_Y_Drive 191.168.1.32

7. Click Change in the Module Definition area.

316 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

The Module Definition dialog box opens.


8. From the Power Structure pull-down menu, choose the power
module appropriate for your application.

Widg-O-matic X-Y Gantry Power Module Configuration


Module Name Power Module Type Power Structure Cat. No.
Gantry_X_Drive IAM 2094-BC01-M01-M
Gantry_Y_Drive AM 2094-BMP5-M

IMPORTANT For PowerFlex 755 CIP Motion drives, you must also choose the motor feedback device. Refer to your PowerFlex 755 user
manual, publication 750-UM001, for more information.

9. Click OK to close the Module Definition dialog box.


10. Click Yes when prompted to confirm your module definition changes.

11. Click OK to close the New Module dialog box and save the configuration.
The new CIP Motion drive module appears under the EtherNet/IP module in the I/O Configuration
folder.
12. Right-click the new CIP Motion module you just created and choose Properties.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 317


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

The Module Properties dialog box opens.

13. Click the Associated Axes tab.


14. Click New Axis.
The New Tag dialog box opens.
15. Create the axis tag.
a. Type the axis Name.
b. Accept the Type, Data Type, Scope, and External
Access default values.
c. Click OK.
The New Tag dialog box closes.
The new axis is assigned as Axis 1.
Widg-O-matic X-Y Gantry Axis Assignments
Digital Digital
Axis Axis Name Input 1 Input 2
1 Gantry_X_Axis Enable Home
2 Gantry_Y_Axis Enable Home

16. Click Apply.

318 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

This assigns the associated axes to the control module.

IMPORTANT For PowerFlex 755 CIP Motion drives, you must configure the motor feedback device. Refer to your PowerFlex 755 user
manual, publication 750-UM001, for more information.

17. Click the Digital Input tab.

The digital inputs (1…4) are assigned default values.


You can reassign them, using the pull-down menus, according to the needs of your application. You can also
unassign digital inputs, if your application does not use them or you want to remove the default
assignments.
For the Widg-O-matic machine example, digital inputs 1 and 2 are assigned Enable and Home
(respectively) and digital inputs 3 and 4 are unassigned.
Widg-O-matic X-Y Gantry Digital Input Assignments
Axis Axis Name Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2
1 Gantry_X_Axis Enable (1) Home
2 Gantry_Y_Axis Enable Home
(1) When using the Enable digital input, you can add a check in the device module code to make
sure it is on before running your machine. Refer to the steps below to see how.

IMPORTANT PowerFlex 755 CIP Motion drives support only one digital input. Refer to your PowerFlex 755 user manual, publication
750-UM001, for more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 319


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Follow these steps if your CIP Motion drive requires Enable Input Checking.
a. Expand the CIP Motion Drive Module that you added to your project.
P03_Axis02_CIP_Drive is used in this example.
b. Double-click the R02_Monitor routine.

The R02_Monitor routine opens.

c. Add an XIC (Examine On) instruction to Rung 5 and assign tag Servo_Axis.EnableInputStatus to it.
d. Save and close the R02_Monitor routine.
The Module Properties dialog box re-appears.
18. Click Apply.
19. Click the Power tab.

The Widg-O-matic machine example uses the default values for the IAM power module as shown. If your
application requires additional shunt configuration, refer to step 20. If not, skip to step 22.

320 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

20. From the Bus Regulator Action pull-down menu, choose the shunt option appropriate for your actual
hardware configuration.
Choose To
Disable Disable the shunt resistor internal to the IAM power module.
Shunt Regulator Choose an internal or external shunt option.
(1) To configure your IAM power module as a common-bus follower IAM module.
Common Bus Follower
(1) Drive will not accept CommonBus Follower selection if three-phase power or DC bus power is applied.

If You Then
Choose
Select Internal to use the shunt resistor internal to the IAM power module.
Shunt
Regulator Select External to use the External Shunt pull-down menu and choose between the Bulletin 1394 shunt
modules and the Bulletin 2094-BSP2 shunt module. (1)
(1) Drive will not accept Internal, 2094-BSP2, or 1394-SRxxxx selection if DC bus voltage is present without having three-phase power applied.

21. Calculate additional bus capacitance, if this applies to your application, and enter the value here (version
18.00 or later).
The Additional Bus Capacitance field only applies to the IAM power module.

IMPORTANT DC common-bus applications must calculate Total Bus Capacitance and Additional Bus Capacitance and set the Add Bus
Cap parameter in the leader IAM power module.
Refer to the Kinetix 6200 and Kinetix 6500 Modular Multi-axis Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2094-UM002 for
more information on making the calculations.

22. Click OK.


23. Repeat step 2 through step 18 and step 22 for the each additional 2094-EN02D-M01-Sx control module.

When your CIP Motion drive configuration is complete, all of the drive modules should appear in the
I/O Configuration folder under your Ethernet module.

For the Widg-O-matic machine example, the X-Y gantry configuration appears as shown.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 321


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Configure the Motion Group


Follow these steps to configure the motion group.

1. Right-click Motion Groups in the Controller


Organizer and choose New Motion Group.

The New Tag dialog box opens.


2. Type the new motion group Name.
3. Click OK.

The new motion group appears under the Motion


Groups folder.

4. Right-click the new motion group in the Controller


Organizer and choose Properties.

The Motion Group Properties dialog box opens.

5. Click the Axis Assignment tab and move your axes


(created earlier) from Unassigned to Assigned.
6. Click the Attribute tab and edit the default values as
appropriate for your application.
7. Click OK.
The assigned axes appear under the new Motion Group.

322 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Configure Axis Properties


Follow these steps to configure axis properties.

1. Right-click an axis in the Controller Organizer under your


configured Motion Group and choose Properties.

The Axis Properties dialog box opens.


2. Click the Motor category.
The Motor Device Specification
dialog box opens.
3. From the Data Source pull-down
menu, choose Catalog Number.
4. Click Change Catalog.
The Change Catalog Number
dialog box opens.

5. Select the motor catalog number appropriate for your


application.
For the Widg-O-matic machine example, the
MPL-B310P-M motor is used for both axes.
To verify the motor catalog number, refer to the motor name
plate.
6. Click OK to close the Change Catalog Number dialog box.
7. Click Apply.

Motor data specific to your motor appears in the Motor category.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 323


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

8. Click the Scaling category and edit the parameter default values as appropriate for your application.

9. Click Apply, if you make changes.


10. Click the Load category and edit the parameter default values as appropriate for your application.

11. Click Apply, if you make changes.

324 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

12. Click the Actions category.


The Actions to Take Upon Conditions dialog box opens. From this dialog box, you can program actions
and change the action for exceptions (faults).
13. Click Parameters.

The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box opens.


From this dialog box you can set delay times for servo motors and RBM modules.

14. Click OK.


15. Repeat step 1 through step 14 for each axis.
16. Verify your device configuration and save the file.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 325


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Sercos Motion Drive Configuration


This section applies to all Kinetix 6200, Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 6000M, Kinetix 2000, Kinetix 7000, and
Ultra3000 sercos drives and includes these procedures:
• Configure Sercos Drive Modules
• Configure the Motion Group
• Configure Axis Properties

These sercos interface drive configuration steps were written specifically for Kinetix 6200 drives. The
Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 2000, Kinetix 7000, and Ultra3000 sercos drive configuration steps are similar. You can
also use the Kinetix 6000M integrated drive-motor (IDM) system when the IDM power interface module
(IPIM) is added to the Kinetix 6000 power rail. Examples for each drive family are given when significant
differences exist.

For more information on drive configuration, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in Additional Resources
on page 15.

Configure Sercos Drive Modules


Follow these steps to configure the sercos drive modules.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file created in Appendix F.


2. Right-click the sercos module you created
and choose New Module.
The Select Module dialog box opens.

3. Expand the Drives category and select drive


components appropriate for your actual
hardware configuration.
In this example, the Kinetix 6200
2094-SE02F-M00-S1 control module and
2094-BC01-M01-M IAM power module are
selected.

326 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Sercos X-Y Gantry Power Module Configuration Example


Module Name Power Module Type Control Module/Power Module Cat. No.
Gantry_X_Drive IAM 2094-SE02F-M00-S1/2094-BC01-M01-M
Gantry_Y_Drive AM 2094-SE02F-M00-S1/2094-BMP5-M

IMPORTANT To configure Kinetix 6200 drive modules (catalog numbers 2094-SE02F-M00-Sx, 2094-BCxx-Mxx-M, and 2094-BMxx-M)
you must be using RSLogix 5000 software, version 17 or later, or the Logix Designer application, version 21 or later.

4. Click OK.
5. Configure the new module.
a. Type the module Name.
b. Enter the Node address.
Set the node address in the software to match the
node setting on the drive.
c. Check Open Module Properties.

Widg-O-matic X-Y Gantry Ethernet Address Configuration


Module Name Node Address
Gantry_X_Drive 1
Gantry_Y_Drive 2

6. Click OK.
7. Click the Associated Axes tab.
8. Click New Axis.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 327


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

The New Tag dialog box opens.


9. Type the axis Name.
AXIS_SERVO_DRIVE is the default Data Type.
10. Click OK.
The axis appears under the Ungrouped Axes folder
in the Controller Organizer.

11. Assign your axis to Node 1.


12. Click Apply.

13. Click the Power tab.


14. From the Bus Regulator Configuration pull-down
menu, choose the shunt option appropriate for your
actual hardware configuration.

If your IAM power module is And your hardware configuration includes this shunt option Then choose
Internal shunt resistors only Internal or <none>
(2) 2094-BSP2
Bulletin 2094 (rail mounted) shunt module
Configured as an IAM module or
common-bus leader IAM module (1) Bulletin 1394 passive shunt module (connected to the 2094-BSP2 shunt 1394-SRxxxx
module)
Bulletin 1336 active shunt module Internal or <none>
(3) N/A. Shunts are disabled on follower IAM module CommonBus Follow
Configured as a common-bus follower IAM module
(1) Drive will not accept Internal, <none>, 2094-BSP2, or 1394-SRxxxx selection if DC bus voltage is present without having three-phase power applied.
(2) To use the 2094-BSP2 shunt module with 2094-BCxx-Mxx-M power modules, you must be using Motion Database 5.12.1 or later. Contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support for more
information.
(3) Drive will not accept CommonBus Follow selection if three-phase power or DC bus power is applied.

328 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

15. Calculate additional bus capacitance, if this applies to your application, and enter the value here (version
20.00 or later).
The Additional Bus Capacitance field only applies to the IAM power module.

IMPORTANT DC common-bus applications must calculate Total Bus Capacitance and Additional Bus Capacitance and set the Add Bus
Cap parameter in the leader IAM power module.
Refer to the DC common bus appendix in the appropriate user manual listed in Additional Resources on page 15 for more
information on making these calculations.

16. Click OK to save and close the Module Properties dialog box.
17. For multi-axis systems, repeat step 2 through step 11 and step 16 for each additional drive module
including Kinetix 6200, Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 6000M, and Kinetix 2000 drives.

For more information on drive configuration, refer to the appropriate user manual listed in Additional Resources
on page 15.

Configure the Motion Group


Follow these steps to configure the motion group.

1. Right-click Motion Groups in the Controller Organizer and choose New Motion Group.
The New Tag dialog box opens.
2. Type the new motion group Name.
3. Click OK.
The new motion group appears under the Motion Groups
folder.
4. Right-click the new motion group and choose Properties.

The Motion Group Properties dialog box opens.


5. Click the Axis Assignment tab and move your axes (created
earlier) from Unassigned to Assigned.
6. Click the Attribute tab and edit the default values as
appropriate for your application.
7. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 329


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Configure Axis Properties


Follow these steps to configure the Axis properties.

1. Right-click an axis in the Controller Organizer and choose Properties.


The Axis Properties dialog box opens.

2. Click the Drive/Motor tab.


3. Click Change Catalog.
The Change Catalog Number dialog box opens.
4. Select the motor catalog number appropriate for your application.
To verify the motor catalog number, refer to the motor name plate.
5. Click OK to close the Change Catalog Number dialog box.
6. On the Drive/Motor tab, check Drive Enable Input Checking.
When checked (default), means a hard drive-enable input signal is
required. Uncheck to remove that requirement.
7. Click Apply.
8. Click the Motor Feedback tab and verify the Feedback Type shown is appropriate for your actual hardware
configuration.
9. Click the Units tab and edit default values as appropriate for your application.

330 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

10. Click the Conversion tab and edit default values as appropriate for your application.

In this example, Rotary is chosen from the Positioning Mode pull-down menu.
11. Click Apply if you made changes.
12. Click the Fault Actions tab.

13. Click Set Custom Stop Action.


The Custom Stop Action Attributes dialog box opens. From this dialog box you can set delay times for
servo motors and RBM modules.
14. Click OK.
15. Repeat step 1 through step 14 for each Bulletin 2094 AM power module and control module combination.
16. Verify your device configuration and save the file.

Kinetix 300 Drive Configuration


Kinetix 300 drive configuration applies to all 2097-3xPRx drive modules and includes these procedures:
• Update Kinetix 300 Add-On Profiles
• Add Kinetix 300 Drives to Your Logix Designer Project
• Configure Kinetix 300 Drives

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 331


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Update Kinetix 300 Add-On Profiles


IMPORTANT The Kinetix 300 Add-On Profiles are independent of the RSLogix 5000 software or Logix Designer application releases. Update your
Kinetix 300 Add-On Profiles to make sure your application runs correctly.

Add-On profiles (AOP) are available for download at the Custom Downloads Add-On Profiles website:
https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/download.aspx?downloadid=addonprofiles

Follow these steps to download Kinetix 300 Add-On profiles.

1. Login to the Custom Download Add-On Profiles website.


The Custom Download Files dialog box opens.

2. Check AOP for 2097 Kinetix Drives.


3. Click Download Now and accept the user license agreement.
If prompted to install the Download Manager, allow the installation.
4. Click the Add-On Profile icon and follow the download instructions.
5. Extract the AOP zip file and run Setup.

332 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Add Kinetix 300 Drives to Your Logix Designer Project


Follow these steps to add each Kinetix 300 drive in your system to the Logix Designer project file. For the
Widg-O-matic machine application example, you add a single drive.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file created in Appendix F.


2. Expand the I/O Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer and browse to the controller backplane.

3. Right-click the network communication module for your Kinetix 300 drive and choose New Module.
For the Widg-O-matic example, the 1756-EN2TR module is chosen.
The Select Module dialog box opens.

4. Expand the Drives folder and select the appropriate Kinetix 300 drive for your application.
For the Widg-O-matic example, the 2097-V31PR0 drive is selected as the diverter drive.
5. Click OK.
The New Module dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 333


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

6. Name the module.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the name is Diverter_Drive.


7. Enter the IP Address.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the IP address is 192.168.1.35.
8. In the Module Definition field, click Change.
The Module Definition dialog box opens.
9. Enter major and minor revisions appropriate for your drive
hardware.
10. Click OK to save and close the Module Definition dialog box.
11. Click OK to save and close the New Module dialog box.
12. Verify your device configuration and save the file.

Configure Kinetix 300 Drives


In this section you configure each Kinetix 300 drive by using MotionView OnBoard software. Follow these three
procedures to configure a single drive.
• Connect to the Kinetix 300 Drive
• Set Kinetix 300 Drive IP Address
• Configure Kinetix 300 Drive Parameters

334 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Connect to the Kinetix 300 Drive

Configuration of the Kinetix 300 drive is performed over the standard 10/100 Mbps Ethernet communication
port using MotionView OnBoard software contained within the drive itself. To access the MotionView software,
the drive and your personal computer must be configured to operate on the same network.

TIP The Kinetix 300 drive’s IP address is scrolling across the keypad display. The default IP address for each Kinetix 300 drive
(192.168.124.200) is used in this connection example.

1. Run a Java enabled web browser such as Internet Explorer.


2. Enter the drive’s IP address into the browser.

The File Download dialog box opens.


3. Click Open.
The Security Warning dialog box may open.
4. If the Security Warning dialog box opens, click
Run.

The Hazard of unexpected motor starting dialog box opens.


5. Read the cautionary text and Click Yes, I have.

The MotionView software opens.


6. Click Connect.

The Connection dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 335


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

7. Enter the drive IP Address.


The drive IP address is scrolling across the keypad display.
8. Click Connect.

MotionView software connects to the drive. Your drive’s IP address and drive organizer appear.
9. Click the drive IP address to display the drive identification data.

Drive
Identification

Drive
Organizer

Set Kinetix 300 Drive IP Address

The drive’s IP address scrolls across the keypad display. The drive IP address must match the IP address used in
your application. Follow this procedure if you need to change the IP address of your Kinetix 300 drive. If the
address is correct then skip this section.

1. Open MotionView software and connect to your Kinetix 300 drive.


Follow the procedure in the previous section or if the
MotionView Java application has been downloaded,
double-click the MotionView Onboard icon.

336 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

2. From the drive organizer, select Communication>Ethernet.

3. Uncheck Obtain IP Address using DHCP.


4. Enter the IP Address.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the IP address is 192.168.1.35.

5. Enter Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0


After changing these parameters a warning message pop-up asks you to cycle power.

6. Click Ok.

Configure Kinetix 300 Drive Parameters

The Kinetix 300 drive parameters are configured using MotionView Onboard software over the EtherNet/IP
network. For more information on drive parameters, refer to the Kinetix 300 EtherNet/IP Indexing User
Manual, publication 2097-UM001.

IMPORTANT If your application does not use the Kinetix 300 safety circuit, make sure that the safe torque-off circuit is bypassed. Refer to the
Kinetix 300 EtherNet/IP Indexing Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2097-UM001, for more information on wiring the safety
circuit.

TIP By default, the Kinetix 300 drive uses a hardware enable signal. Refer to the Kinetix 300 EtherNet/IP Indexing User Manual,
publication 2097-UM001, for enable circuit wiring examples.

1. Open the MotionView software. If the MotionView Java application has been
downloaded, double-click the MotionView Onboard icon.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 337


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

2. Click the drive identification in the drive organizer and enter your Kinetix 300 drive name in the Drive
Name field (optional).
For the Widg-O-matic application example, Diverter_Drive is the Drive Name.

3. Select Motor in the drive organizer.

338 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Allen-Bradley motors and actuators with intelligent feedback devices automatically populate data fields in
the motor configuration. For Allen-Bradley motors and actuators with incremental encoders, click Change
Motor and choose from the provided list.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the Kinetix 300 demo box containing a 2097-V31PR0 drive
and a TLY-A110P-BJ62AA motor was used.
4. Select General in the drive organizer.

5. From the Drive Mode pull-down menu, choose AutoTune.


AutoTune is the default setting. Run AutoTune on your motor/drive combination if not already done. For a
detailed understanding of the AutoTune parameter, refer to the Kinetix 300 EtherNet/IP Indexing User
Manual, publication 2097-UM001.
If your drive has been tuned with this motor, you can switch the Drive mode to Index or EtherNet/IP
External Reference.

TIP The Kinetix 300 device module includes logic to switch the Drive mode as required by your application.

6. From the Accel/Decel Limits pull-down menu, choose Enable.


7. Type values in the Accel and Decel limit fields appropriate for your application.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the Accel and Decel limit values are 200.

TIP The Kinetix 300 device module includes logic to adjust the Accel/Decel limits as required by the application.

8. From the Fault Reset pull-down menu, choose Manual Only.


9. Type a value in the User Units Value field.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the User Units value is 1.0.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 339


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

10. Select Communication>Ethernet>EtherNet/IP (CIP) in the drive organizer to display the Input and
Output Assembly Links (datalinks) to the controller.
The Widg-O-matic application example and Kinetix 300 drive do not require any additional Assembly
Links. Leave the entries at default values.
11. Select IO>Digital IO in the drive organizer.

You can leave the input and output functions at default values.
12. From the Enable Switch Function pull-down menu, choose Inhibit.
13. Select Limits>Velocity Limits in the drive organizer.

These values set status bits used in the Kinetix 300 drive.
14. Type values for the Zero Speed, Speed Window, and At Speed parameters.
The Velocity Limit parameter values are the recommended starting values.

340 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

15. Select Position Limits in the drive organizer.

16. Type a value for the Abort Decel field.


The Abort Decel parameter is used when the drive stops for a fault, index abort, or disable function.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the Abort Decel parameter value is 200. The other values set
status bits used in the Kinetix 300 drive.

TIP The Kinetix 300 device module includes logic to adjust the Abort Decel limit required by the application.

17. Type values for the other Position Limit parameters.


The Position Limit parameter values are the recommended starting values.
18. Select Indexing in the drive organizer.

19. From the AutoStart Index pull-down menu, choose Disable.


20. Leave all of the other Index configuration values as default.

TIP The Kinetix 300 device module includes logic to configure the Indexing parameters as required by the application.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 341


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

21. Select Homing in the drive organizer.

22. Enter values for the Homing parameters according to your application.
The values shown were used to configure the homing parameters for the Kinetix 300 demo box used in the
Widg-O-matic application example.
23. From the MotionView menu bar, click Save Configuration.

The Save dialog box opens.

24. Enter a file name.


For the Widg-O-matic application example, the file name is Widg_O_Matic.
25. Click Save.

342 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

E3 Plus Overload Relay with Communication Auxiliary Configuration


E3 Plus overload relay configuration applies to E3 Plus overload relays with the 193-DNENCAT
communication auxiliary module, and includes these procedures:
• Update E3 Plus Add-On Profiles
• Add E3 Plus Devices to Your Logix Designer Project

Update E3 Plus Add-On Profiles


IMPORTANT The E3 Plus Add-On Profiles are independent of RSLogix 5000 software or Logix Designer application releases. Update your E3 Plus
Add-On Profiles to make sure your application runs correctly.

Add-On profiles (AOP) are available for download at the Custom Downloads Add-On Profiles website:
https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/download.aspx?downloadid=addonprofiles

Follow these steps to download E3 Plus Add-On profiles.

1. Login to the Custom Download Add-On Profiles website.


The Custom Download Files dialog box opens.

2. Check AOP for E3 Plus 193-DNENCAT(R).


3. Click Download Now and accept the user license agreement.
If prompted to install the Download Manager, allow the installation.
4. Click the Add-On Profile icon and follow the download instructions.
5. Extract the AOP zip file and run MPSetup.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 343


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Add E3 Plus Devices to Your Logix Designer Project


Follow these steps to add each 193-DNENCAT device in your system to the Logix Designer project file.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file created in the previous section (for the Widgomatic example the
project file was named Widgomatic.acd).
2. Expand the I/O Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer and browse to the controller backplane.
3. Right-click the network communication module for your E3 Plus Device and choose New Module.
The Select Module dialog box opens.
4. Expand the Communications folder and
select the Ethernet to DeviceNet
Communications Auxiliary module.

5. Click OK.
The New Module dialog box opens.
6. Name the module.
7. Enter the IP Address.
8. In the Module Definition field, click
Change.

The Module Definition dialog box opens.


9. Enter the series and revision appropriate for your hardware.
10. Click OK to save and close the Module Definition dialog box.
11. Click OK to save and close the New Module dialog box.

344 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

12. Verify your device configuration and save the file.

IMPORTANT You must set the following parameters in the E3 Plus overload relay or the AOI does not function properly in your Logix Designer
application:
• Param 59, Output Assembly = 105
• Param 60, Input Assembly = 100
• Param 61, Assy Word 0 Param = 21 (supplies status of Inputs and Outputs)
• Param 62, Assy Word 1 Param = 4 (supplies Avg current)
• Param 63, Assy Word 2 Param = 14 (supplies Trip Status)
• Param 64, Assy Word 3 Param = 15 (supplies Warning Status)

Refer to the Bulletin 193 EtherNet/IP Communications Auxiliary User Manual, 193-UM014, for details on
how to configure parameters.

E300 Overload Relay Configuration


E300 overload relay configuration includes these procedures:
• Update E300 Add-On Profiles
• Add E300 devices to your Logix Designer Project

Update E300 Add-On Profiles


IMPORTANT The E300 Add-On Profiles are independent of RSLogix 5000 software or Logix Designer application releases. Update your E300
Add-On Profiles to make sure your application runs correctly.

Add-On profiles (AOP) are available for download at the Custom Downloads Add-On Profiles website:
https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/download.aspx?downloadid=addonprofiles

Follow these steps to download E300 Add-On profiles.

1. Login to the Custom Download Add-On Profiles website.


The Custom Download Files dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 345


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

2. Check the AOP for 193-ECM-ETR E300 Ethernet Overload Relay.


3. Click Download Now and accept the user license agreement.
If prompted to install the Download Manager, allow the installation.
4. Click the Add-On Profile icon and follow the download instructions.
5. Extract the AOP zip file and run MPSetup.

Add E300 Devices to Your Logix Designer Project


Follow these steps to add each E300 device in your system to the Logix Designer project file.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file created in the previous section (for the Widgomatic example the
project file was named Widgomatic.acd).
2. Expand the I/O Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer and browse to the controller backplane.
3. Right-click the network communication module for your E300 device and choose New Module.
The Select Module dialog box opens.
4. Expand the Communications folder and
select the E300 relay.

5. Click OK.
The New Module dialog box opens.
6. Name the module.
7. Enter the IP Address.
8. In the Module Definition field, click
Change.

The Module Definition dialog box opens.

346 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

9. Enter the series and revision appropriate


for your hardware.
10. Select the appropriate sensing and control
modules.
11. Click OK to save and close the Module
Definition dialog box.
12. Click OK to save and close the New
Module dialog box.
13. Verify your device configuration and save
the file.

SMC-50 Soft Starter Configuration


SMC-50 soft starter configuration includes these procedures:
• Update SMC-50 Add-On Profiles
• Add SMC-50 Devices to your Logix Designer Project
• Download Soft Starter Parameters

Update SMC-50 Add-On Profiles


IMPORTANT The SMC-50 Add-On Profiles are independent of RSLogix 5000 software or Logix Designer application releases. Update your
SMC-50 Add-On Profiles to make sure your application runs correctly.

Add-On profiles (AOP) are available for download at the Custom Downloads Add-On Profiles website:
https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/download.aspx?downloadid=addonprofiles

Follow these steps to download SMC-50 Add-On profiles.

1. Login to the Custom Download Add-On Profiles website.


The Custom Download Files dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 347


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

2. Check the AOP for Drives-PowerFlex/SCANport profile.


3. Click Download Now and accept the user license agreement.
If prompted to install the Download Manager, allow the installation.
4. Click the Add-On Profile icon and follow the download instructions.
5. Extract the AOP zip file and run MPSetup.

Add SMC-50 Devices to Your Logix Designer Project


Follow these steps to add each SMC-50 device in your system to the Logix Designer project file.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file created in the previous section (for the Widgomatic example the
project file was named Widgomatic.acd).
2. Expand the I/O Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer and browse to the controller backplane.
3. Right-click the network communication module for your SMC-50 device and choose New Module.
The Select Module dialog box opens.
4. Expand the Drives folder and select the
SMC-50 module.

5. Click OK.

The New Module dialog box opens.

6. Name the module.


7. Enter the IP Address.
8. In the Module Definition field, click
Change.

The Module Definition dialog box opens.

348 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

The Module Definition dialog box lets you configure and access drive data beyond standard I/O.

9. Configure module definitions.

IMPORTANT The datalinks listed for the SMC-50 soft starter must be configured exactly as shown for successful faceplate AOI import
and operation. If additional datalinks are required for your application, modifications to the corresponding AOI can be
required.

a. Enter major and minor revisions appropriate for your drive hardware.
b. Enter drive rating appropriate for your drive hardware.
c. Set datalink definitions.
10. Click OK to save and close the Module Definition dialog box.
11. Click OK to save and close the New Module dialog box.
12. Verify your device configuration and save the file.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 349


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Download Soft Starter Parameters


IMPORTANT Before downloading drive parameters, you must configure personal computer communication properties and EtherNet/IP driver.
Refer to Appendix D on page 257 for more information.

1. Download application to the Logix5000 controller and go online.


2. Expand the I/O Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer.

3. Double-click your SMC-50 soft starter module.

350 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

The Module Properties dialog box opens.

4. On the Drive tab, click the Connect to Drive icon.


The Differences Found dialog box opens.
5. Click Download.
Project parameters transfer to the drive.
Following download, the Module Properties dialog box displays green Drive Connected status indicator
and soft starter information is displayed. If not, follow other version compatibility update dialog boxes to
connect to soft starter.

6. Click OK.

7. Click to save your Logix Designer application file.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 351


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Configuration


ArmorStart distributed motor controller configuration includes these procedures:
• Update ArmorStart Add-On Profiles
• Add ArmorStart Devices to Your Logix Designer Project

Update ArmorStart Add-On Profiles


IMPORTANT The ArmorStart Add-On Profiles are independent of RSLogix 5000 software or Logix Designer application releases. Update your
ArmorStart Add-On Profiles to make sure your application runs correctly.

Add-On profiles (AOP) are available for download at the Custom Downloads Add-On Profiles website:
https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/download.aspx?downloadid=addonprofiles

Follow these steps to download ArmorStart Add-On profiles.

1. Login to the Custom Download Add-On Profiles website.


The Custom Download Files dialog box opens.

2. Check the AOP for ArmorStart Bulletin 280E or 290E profile.


3. Click Download Now and accept the user license agreement.
If prompted to install the Download Manager, allow the installation.
4. Click the Add-On Profile icon and follow the download instructions.
5. Extract the AOP zip file and run MPSetup.

Add ArmorStart Devices to Your Logix Designer Project


Follow these steps to add each ArmorStart device in your system to the Logix Designer project file.

1. Open your Logix Designer project file created in the previous section (for the Widgomatic example the
project file was named Widgomatic.acd).
2. Expand the I/O Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer and browse to the controller backplane.

352 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

3. Right-click the network communication module for your ArmorStart device under other and click OK.
The Select Module dialog box opens.
4. Expand the Drives folder and select the
ArmorStart module.

5. Click OK.

The New Module dialog box opens.

6. Name the module.


7. Enter the IP Address.
8. In the Module Definition field, click
Change.

The Module Definition dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 353


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

9. Enter the appropriate information for your hardware.


a. From the Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) Keypad and Source Brake pull-down menus, choose Yes.
These options are required to be enabled.
b. From the User I/O pull-down menus, choose Output for I/O 3, 4, 5 and choose Input for I/O 1, 2, 3.
You can change the User I/O settings based on application requirements. If modified, the module
definition changes affecting the AOI input and output data type. Refer to How to Change the AOI
Input and Output Data Type on page 390.

IMPORTANT The User I/O configuration must be defined in the HMI 29xE faceplate parameter file for parameters #10, #11, #12, #13,
#14 and #15.
HOA Keypad and Source Brake options must be enabled to work with the Logix AOI and HMI faceplate. These settings
won't affect hardware performance, even if the hardware doesn't have the options.

10. Click OK to save and close the Module Definition dialog box.
11. Click Yes to acknowledge the Change module definition warning.

354 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

12. Click OK to save and close


the New Module dialog
box.

13. Verify your device configuration and save the file.


14. Refer to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller user manuals, publications 290E-UM001 and
280E-UM001, for more information on how to configure the device.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 355


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Import and Configure Logic Modules


In this section you import the machine, application, and device modules into your Logix5000 application
without using the DMAT Wizard or making edits after initial file is created.

Import and Configure the Machine Logic Module


Follow these steps to add the preconfigured machine logic program file to your Logix Designer project and
configure it to your specific application.

1. Open your Logix Designer project that you added to the Device Configurations in Appendix G.

For the Widg-O-matic machine application example, the WidgOmatic project was opened.
2. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer and drag-and-drop the MainProgram folder to the
Unscheduled Programs / Phases folder.
3. Right-click the Main Task folder, and choose Import Program.

356 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

4. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 01_Machine Logic
folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.
5. Select the Machine_Module.L5x file and click Import.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 357


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

6. Type the desired name for your machine in the Final Name field.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, P01_WidgOmatic is the Final Name.


7. Click Tags in the Import Content organizer.

358 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

8. Replace _MachineName with the desired tag name of your machine.


For the Widg-O-matic application example, WidgOmatic is the tag name.

9. Click OK.
The new Machine Program appears in the Controller Organizer within the Main Task folder.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 359


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Import and Configure Application Logic Modules


Follow these steps to add preconfigured application logic to your Logix Designer project and configure it for
each of your specific applications within your machine.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer, and right-click the Main Task folder.

2. Choose Import Program.


3. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 02_Application
Logic folder.

360 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.
4. Select the Application_Module.L5x file and click Import.

The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 361


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

5. Enter the desired name for your initial application in the Final Name field.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the Final Name is P02_Assembly.


6. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.
The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

7. Replace the _ApplicationName and _MachineName with the desired tag names of your application and
machine.

362 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

For the Widg-O-matic application example, Assembly was entered as the ApplicationName and
WidgOmatic was entered as the MachineName.

8. Click OK.
The new application program appears in the Controller Organizer within the Main Task folder.

9. Repeat step 1 through step 8 for each application within your machine.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, a second application was entered named P03_Packaging.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 363


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Import and Configure Device Logic Modules


Follow these steps to add preconfigured device logic to your Logix Designer project and configure it for each of
your specific devices within your machine.

Import and Configure CIP Motion or Sercos Drive Modules

Follow these steps to add preconfigured CIP Motion and sercos interface drive device logic modules to your
Logix Designer project.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer and right-click the Main Task folder.

2. Choose Import Program.


3. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 03_Device Modules
folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.

364 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

4. Select the Device Module program file that fits your initial CIP Motion or sercos interface drive within
your machine based on the Motion Drives Logic Modules table.

Motion Drives Logic Modules


Device Module Program File Supported Devices
CIPMotion_Drive_Module.L5X Kinetix 6500, Kinetix 5500, and PowerFlex 755 configured as a CIP Motion drive.
CIPMotion_FdbkOnly_Module.L5X Auxiliary feedback-only axis on CIP Motion drives.
SERCOS_Drive_Module.L5X Kinetix 2000, Kinetix 6000, Kinetix 6200, and Ultra3000 sercos interface drives
SERCOS_FdbkOnly_Module.L5X Auxiliary feedback-only axis on sercos interface drives.
SERCOS_IDM_ParentIAM_Drive_Module.L5X Kinetix 6000 and Kinetix 6200 sercos IAM interface drive when used with the Kinetix 6000M system
Virtual_Axis_Module.L5X Virtual axis for CIP Motion or sercos interface drives configuration

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the CIPMotion_Drive_Module.L5X program file was
selected for the first Kinetix 6500 CIP Motion drive.
5. Click Import.
The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 365


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

6. Enter the desired name for your initial Device in Final Name field.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, P04_Gantry_X_Drive is the Final Name.


7. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.
The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

8. Replace Final Tag Names with associated axis, machine, drive, and motion group names that you have
already configured.
a. Replace _AxisName of _AxisName, _AxisName_Ctrl, and AxisName_FP tags with the name of the axis
for your drive.
b. Replace _MachineName of _MachineName tag with the machine name of your project.
c. Replace _ModuleName of _ModuleName tag with the device name of your drive.
d. Replace _MotionGroupName of _MotionGroupName tag with the motion group name within your
project.

366 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

For the Widg-O-matic application example, these are the final tag names.

9. Click OK.
The new Device Module Program appears in the Controller Organizer within the Main Task folder.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the new program named
P04_Gantry_X_Drive appears in Controller Organizer.
10. Repeat step 1 through step 9 for each motion drive in your machine.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, a second Kinetix 6500


CIP Motion drive device program named P05_Gantry_Y_Drive was
imported and configured.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 367


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Import and Configure PowerFlex Standard Drive Modules

Follow these steps to add preconfigured PowerFlex standard drive device logic modules to your Logix Designer
project.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer and right-click the Main Task folder.

2. Choose Import Program.


3. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 03_Device Modules
folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.

368 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

4. Select the Device Module program file that fits your initial PowerFlex standard drive within your machine
based on the PowerFlex Drives Logic Modules table.

PowerFlex Drives Logic Modules


Device Module Program File Supported Devices
PF4xx_Drive_Module.L5X PowerFlex 4-class standard drives (for example, PF40P_Drive_Module.L5X supports PowerFlex 40P Drives).
PF7xxx_Drive_Module.L5X PowerFlex 7-class standard drives (for example, PF70EC_Drive_Module.L5X supports PowerFlex 70EC Drives).
PF70EC_Drive_Module_Energy.L5X PowerFlex 70EC drives with additional logic to support an energy data tab on the HMI faceplate.
PF700S_2P_Drive_Module_Energy.L5X PowerFlex 700S_2P drives with additional logic to support an energy data tab on the HMI faceplate.
PF700VC_Drive_Module_Energy.L5X PowerFlex 700VC drives with additional logic to support an energy data tab on the HMI faceplate.
PF753_Drive_Module.L5X PowerFlex 753 standard drives
PF753_Drive_Module_Energy.L5X PowerFlex 753 standard drives with additional logic to support an energy data tab on the HMI faceplate.
PF755_Drive_Module.L5X PowerFlex 755 drive configured as a standard drive.
PF755_Drive_Module_Energy.L5X PowerFlex 755 standard drives with additional logic to support an energy data tab on the HMI faceplate.
PF525_Drive_Module.L5X PowerFlex 525 EENET drive.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, PF753_Drive_Module.L5X program file was selected for the
only PowerFlex drive in the machine.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 369


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

5. Click Import.

The Import Configuration dialog box opens.


6. Enter the desired name for your initial device in Final Name field.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the Final Name is P06_Conveyor_Drive.
7. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.

The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

370 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

8. Replace Final Tag Names with the associated drive and machine names you have already configured.
a. Where applicable, replace _DriveName with the name of PowerFlex drive in I/O tree.
b. Replace _DriveName of _DriveName:I, _DriveName:O, and _DriveName_FP tags with the name your
PowerFlex drive.
c. Replace _MachineName of _MachineName tag with the machine name of your project.
d. Replace _ModuleName of _ModuleName tag with the device name of your drive.
e. If a device module with energy support was selected, there will be additional tags named
_DriveName_BEO (base energy object). Replace _DriveName in all of these tags with the name of your
PowerFlex drive.
For the Widg-O-matic example, _DriveName_BEO was replaced with ConveyorDrive_BEO.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the following tag names were entered.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 371


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

9. Click Other Components under the Import Content organizer.

10. The Configure Components References dialog box opens.


11. Replace _DriveName within the Final Name field with the name of your PowerFlex drive in the I/O tree.
12. Click OK.
The new Device Module Program appears in the Controller Organizer within the Main Task folder.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the new program named


P06_ Conveyor_Drive appears in Controller Organizer.
If a device module with energy support was selected, the program contains an additional routine named
R05_Energy. Refer to Set MSG Path in the E3 Plus Energy Monitoring Routine on page 81, for more
information.
13. Repeat step 1 through step 12 for each PowerFlex drive in your machine.

372 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Import and Configure Kinetix 300 EtherNet/IP Motion Drive Modules

Follow these steps to add preconfigured Kinetix 300 EtherNet/IP motion drive device logic modules to your
Logix Designer project.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer and right-click the Main Task folder.

2. Choose Import Program.


3. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 03_Device Modules
folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 373


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

4. Select the K300_Drive_Module.L5X program file for your initial Kinetix 300 Ethernet Motion Drive
within your machine.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, K300_Drive_Module.L5X program file was selected as the
only Kinetix 300 drive in the machine.
5. Click Import.
The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

6. Enter the desired name for your initial Device in Final Name field.

For the Widg-O-matic application example, the Final Name is P07_Diverter_Drive.

374 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

7. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.


The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

8. Replace the Final Tag Names with the associated drive and machine names you have already configured.
a. Replace _DriveName of _DriveName:I, _DriveName:O, _DriveName_Ctrl, _DriveName_FP and (8)
_DriveName_MSG_xxxx tags with the name your Kinetix 300 drive.
b. Replace _MachineName of _MachineName tag with the machine name of your project.
c. Replace _ModuleName of _ModuleName tag with the device name of your drive.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the following tag names were entered.

9. Click Other Components within the Import Content organizer.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 375


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

The Configure Components References dialog box opens.

10. Replace _DriveName in the Final Name field with the name of your Kinetix 300 drive.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, Diverter_Drive is the Final Name.

11. Click OK.


The new Device Module Program appears in the Controller Organizer within the Main Task folder.
For the Widg-O-matic application example, the new program named P07_Diverter_Drive appears in
Controller Organizer.

12. Repeat step 1 through step 11 for each Kinetix 300 drive in your machine.

376 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Import and Configure E3 Plus Device Modules

Follow these steps to add preconfigured E3 Plus device logic modules to your Logix Designer project.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer and right-click the Main Task folder.

2. Choose Import Program.


3. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 03_Device Modules
folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 377


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

4. Select E3Plus_Module.L5X or E3Plus_Module_Energy.L5X if energy support is required.

5. Click Import.
The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

6. Enter the desired name for your initial Device in the Final Name field.

In this example, the Final Name is P11_E3Plus.


7. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.

378 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

8. The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

9. Replace Final Tag Names with the associated drive and machine names you have already configured.
a. Replace _DeviceName of _DeviceName:I, _DeviceName:O, _DeviceName_FP, and
_DeviceName_MSG tags with the name of your E3 Plus device.
b. Replace _MachineName of _MachineName tag with the machine name of your project.
c. Replace _ModuleName of _ModuleName tag with the device name of your E3 Plus device.
If a device module with energy support was selected, there will be additional tags named
_DeviceName_BEO.
d. Replace _DeviceName in all of these tags with the name of your E3 Plus device.

10. Click Other Components within the Import Content organizer.


The Configure Component References dialog box opens.

11. Replace the Final name (_DeviceName) with the name of your E3 Plus device.
12. Click OK.
The new Device Module Program appears in the Controller Organizer within the Main
Task folder.

If a device module with energy support was selected, the program will contain an additional
routine named R05_Energy. Refer to Set MSG Path in the E3 Plus Energy Monitoring Routine on page 81, for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 379


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Import and Configure E300 Device Modules

Follow these steps to add preconfigured E300 device logic modules to your Logix Designer project.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer and right-click the Main Task folder.

2. Choose Import Program.


3. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 03_Device Modules
folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.

380 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

4. Select E300_Module.L5X or E300_Module_Energy.L5X if energy support is required.

5. Click Import.
The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 381


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

6. Enter the desired name for your initial Device in the Final Name field.

In this example, the Final Name is P11_E300.


7. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.
8. The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

9. Replace Final Tag Names with the associated drive and machine names you have already configured.
a. Replace _DeviceName of _DeviceName:I, _DeviceName:O, _DeviceName_FP, and
_DeviceName_MSG tags with the name of your E300 device.
b. Replace _MachineName of _MachineName tag with the machine name of your project.
c. Replace _ModuleName of _ModuleName tag with the device name of your E300 device.
If a device module with energy support was selected, there will be additional tags named
_DeviceName_BEO.

382 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

d. Replace _DeviceName in all of these tags with the name of your E300 device.

10. Click Other Components within the Import Content organizer.


The Configure Component References dialog box opens.

11. Replace the Final name (_DeviceName) with the name of your E300 device.
12. Click OK.
The new Device Module Program appears in the Controller Organizer within the Main
Task folder.

If a device module with energy support was selected, the program will contain an additional
routine named R05_Energy. Refer to Set MSG Path in the E3 Plus Energy Monitoring Routine on page 81, for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 383


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Import and Configure SMC-50 Soft Starter Device Modules

Follow these steps to add preconfigured SMC-50 soft-starter device logic modules to your Logix Designer
project.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer and right-click the Main Task folder.

2. Choose Import Program.


3. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 03_Device Modules
folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.

384 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

4. Select SMC50_Module.L5X or SMC50_Module_Energy.L5X if energy support is required.

5. Click Import.
6. The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

7. Enter the desired name for your initial Device in Final Name field.

In this example, the Final Name is P10_SMC50.


8. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 385


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

9. The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

10. Replace Final Tag Names with the associated drive and machine names you have already configured.
a. Replace _DeviceName of _DeviceName:I, _DeviceName:O, _DeviceName_MSG,
_DeviceName_MSG_DATA, and _DeviceName_FP tags with the name of your SMC-50 device.
b. Replace _MachineName of _MachineName tag with the machine name of your project.
c. Replace _ModuleName of _ModuleName tag with the device name of your SMC-50 device.
If a device module with energy support was selected, there will be additional tags named
_DeviceName_BEO.
d. Replace _DeviceName in all of these tags with the name of your SMC-50 device.

11. Click Other Components within the Import Content organizer.


The Configure Component References dialog box opens.

12. Replace the Final Name (_DeviceName) with the name of your SMC-50 device.
13. Click OK.
The new Device Module Program appears in the Controller Organizer within the
Main Task folder.

If a device module with energy support was selected, the program will contain an additional
routine named R05_Energy. Refer to Set MSG Path in the E3 Plus Energy Monitoring Routine on page 81, for
more information.

386 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

Import and Configure ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller Device Modules

Follow these steps to add preconfigured ArmorStart distributed motor controller device logic modules to your
Logix Designer project.

1. Expand the Tasks folder in your Controller Organizer and right-click the Main Task folder.

2. Choose Import Program.


3. Navigate to the 4-Controller Logic folder within the toolkit’s files folder and open the 03_Device Modules
folder.

Your personal computer’s harddrive path is


C:\Program Files\RA_Simplification\DMAT\B-Files\4-Controller Logic.
4. Select AS294E_woIPS_Module.L5X per application requirements.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 387


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

This example uses the ArmorStart LT 294E motor controller (without internal power supply).

5. Click Import.
6. The Import Configuration dialog box opens.

7. Enter the desired name for your initial Device in Final Name field.

In this example, the Final Name is P03_AS294E.

388 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

8. Click Tags within the Import Content organizer.


9. The Configure Tag References dialog box opens.

10. Replace Final Tag Names with the associated drive and machine names you have already configured.
a. Replace_DeviceName of _DeviceName:I, _DeviceName:O, _DeviceName_Fault_Msg,
_DeviceName_FaultCode, _DeviceName_FP, _DeviceName_Warning_Msg and
_DeviceName_WarningCode tags with the name of your ArmorStart device.
b. Replace _MachineName of _MachineName tag with the machine name of your project.
c. Replace _ModuleName of _ModuleName tag with the device name of your ArmorStart device.
d. Replace _DeviceName in all of these tags with the name of your ArmorStart device.
11. Click Other Components within the Import Content organizer.
The Configure Component References dialog box opens.

12. Replace the Final Name (_DeviceName) with the name of your ArmorStart device.
13. Click OK.
The new Device Module Program appears in the Controller Organizer within the Main
Task folder.

If a device module with energy support was selected, the program will contain an additional
routine named R05_Energy. Refer to Set MSG Path in the E3 Plus Energy Monitoring Routine on page 81, for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 389


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

How to Change the AOI Input and Output Data Type

Follow these steps to change the ArmorStart LT AOI input and output data type. This example shows the
ArmorStart LT 294E motor controller without IPS (internal power supply).

1. Under I/O Configuration in the Controller Organizer, right-click your ArmorStart motor controller and
choose Properties.
2. Click Change in the Module Definition area

The Module Definition dialog box appears.

3. Configure the User I/O settings per application requirements.


In this example, all the User I/O settings are configured as inputs.
4. Click OK to save and close the Module Definition dialog box.

390 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

5. Click Yes to acknowledge the Change module definition warning.

6. Click OK to close the Module Properties dialog box.

7. Under your ArmorStart controller in the Controller Organizer, double-click your ArmorStart motor
controller and observe the new Data Type information.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 391


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

8. Under the Add-On-Instruction folder in the Controller Organizer,


right-click the ArmorStart AOI (AS_2XXE_AOI_...) and choose
Open Definition.

The Add-On Instruction Definition dialog box appears.

9. Click the Parameters tab.


10. Search for the Input and Output tags and click the ellipses under the Data Type column for the Input tags.
The Select Data Type dialog box appears.
11. Select the new Data Type previously identified in step 7.
12. Repeat step 10 for the output tags.
13. Click OK to close the Select Data Type dialog box.

392 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard Appendix G

14. Review the new Data Type and click Apply.

15. Review the new parameters and click Yes to apply the edits.

16. Click OK.

The new AOI input and output Data Type changes are complete.

Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015 393


Appendix G Controller, Network, and Device Configuration Without the DMAT Wizard

Notes:

394 Rockwell Automation Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support you can find technical and application notes, sample code, and links to
software service packs. You can also visit our Support Center at https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ for software
updates, support chats and forums, technical information, FAQs, and to sign up for product notification updates.

In addition, we offer multiple support programs for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting. For more
information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/online-phone.

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/overview.page, or contact your local
Outside United States or Canada
Rockwell Automation representative.

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
United States distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at


http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.

Publication IASIMP-QS019F-EN-P - September 2015


Supersedes Publication IASIMP-QS019E-EN-P - August 2013 Copyright © 2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

You might also like